Pioneer Elite DV-48AV Operating Instructions
Register Y our Pr oduct at http://www .pioneerelectr onics.com (US) http://www .pioneerelectr onics.ca (Canada) D VD Pla y er D V -48A V Operating Instructions DV48AV_EN.book 1 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ æÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ åÂÂ
W ARNING â TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. D1-4-2-1_En IMPORT ANT NOTICE â THE SERIAL NUMBER FOR THIS EQUIPMENT IS LOCA TED IN THE REAR. PLEASE WRITE THIS SERIAL NUMBER ON YOUR ENCL OSED W ARRANTY CARD AND KEEP IN A SECURE AREA. THIS IS FOR YOUR SECURITY . D1-4-2-6-1_En CAUTION : USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MA Y RESUL T IN HAZARDOUS RADIA TION EXPOSURE. CAUTION : THE USE OF OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH THIS PRODUCT WILL INCREASE EYE HAZARD. D6-8-2-1_En NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to P art 15 of the FCC R ules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful inter ference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful inter ference to radio communications. However , there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful inter ference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the inter ference by one or more of the following measures: â R eorient or relocate the receiving antenna. â Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver . â Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. â Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. D8-10-1-2_En Information to User Alteration or modifications carried out without appropriate authorization may invalidate the user âÂÂs right to operate the equipment. D8-10-2_En W ARNING: Handling the cord on this product or cords associated with accessories sold with the product will expose you to lead, a chemical known to the State of California and other governmental entities to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. D36-P4_En W ash hands after handling T his product contains mercur y . Disposal of this material may be regulated due to environmental considerations. F or disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or the Electronics Industries Alliance : www .eiae.org. K057_En The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (ser vicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. The lightning flash with arrowhead, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. CAUTION: TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE P ARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN D1-4-2-3_En IMPOR T ANT Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly . After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference. DV48AV_EN.book 2 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ æÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ åÂÂ
READ INSTRUCTIONS â All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the product is operated. RET AIN INSTRUCTIONS â The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference. HEED WARNINGS â All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS â All operating and use instructions should be followed. CLEANING â The product should be cleaned only with a polishing cloth or a soft dr y cloth. Never clean with furniture wax, benzine, insecticides or other volatile liquids since they may corrode the cabinet. A TT ACHMENTS â Do not use attachments not recommended by the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards. WA TER AND MOISTURE â Do not use this product near water â for example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool; and the like. ACCESSORIES â Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer , or sold with the product. Any mounting of the product should follow the manufacturer âÂÂs instructions, and should use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer . CART â A product and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the product and cart combination to overturn. VENTILA TION â Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, and these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer âÂÂs instructions have been adhered to. POWER SOURCES â This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your product dealer or local power company . LOCA TION â The appliance should be installed in a stable location. NONUSE PERIODS â The power cord of the appliance should be unplugged from the outlet when left un-used for a long period of time. GROUNDING OR POLARIZA TION ⢠If this product is equipped with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other), it will fit into the outlet only one way . This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug. ⢠If this product is equipped with a three-wire grounding type plug, a plug having a third (grounding) pin, it will only fit into a grounding type power outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding type plug. POWER-CORD PROTECTION â P ower-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the product. OUTDOOR ANTENNA GROUNDING â If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFP A 70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna-discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. See Figure A. LIGHTNING â For added protection for this product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product due to lightning and power-line surges. POWER LINES â An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal. OVERLOADING â Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock. OBJECT AND LIQUID ENTRY â Never push objects of any kind into this product through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product. SERVICING â Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified ser vice personnel. DAMAGE REQUIRING SERVICE â Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions: ⢠When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged. ⢠If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the product. ⢠If the product has been exposed to rain or water . ⢠If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to its normal operation. ⢠If the product has been dropped or damaged in any way . ⢠When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance â this indicates a need for ser vice. REPLACEMENT P ARTS â When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other hazards. SAFETY CHECK â Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the product is in proper operating condition. WALL OR CEILING MOUNTING â The product should not be mounted to a wall or ceiling. HEA T â The product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products (including amplifiers) that produce heat. GROUND CLAMP ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT (NEC SECTION 810-20) GROUNDING CONDUCTORS (NEC SECTION 810-21) GROUND CLAMPS POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM (NEC ART 250, P ART H) NEC â NA TIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE Fig. A D1-4-2-2_En This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numérique de la Classe B est conforme àla norme NMB-003 du Canada. D8-10-1-3_EF CAUTION: This product satisfies FCC regulations when shielded cables and connectors are used to connect the unit to other equipment. T o prevent electromagnetic interference with electric appliances such as radios and televisions, use shielded cables and connectors for connections. D8-10-3a_En DV48AV_EN.book 3 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ æÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ åÂÂ
C67-7-3_En S001_En Selecting fine audio equipment such as the unit youâÂÂve just purchased is only the start of your musical enjoyment. Now itâÂÂs time to consider how you can maximize the fun and excitement your equipment offers. This manufacturer and the Electronic Industries AssociationâÂÂs Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion-and, most importantly , without affecting your sensitive hearing. Sound can be deceiving. Over time your hearing âÂÂcomfort levelâ adapts to higher volumes of sound. So what sounds âÂÂnormalâ can actually be loud and harmful to your hearing. Guard against this by setting your equipment at a safe level BEFORE your hearing adapts. T o establish a safe level: ⢠Start your volume control at a low setting. ⢠Slowly increase the sound until you can hear it comfortably and clearly , and without distortion . Once you have established a comfortable sound level: ⢠Set the dial and leave it there. T aking a minute to do this now will help to prevent hearing damage or loss in the future. After all, we want you listening for a lifetime. We W ant Y ou Listening For A Lifetime Used wisely , your new sound equipment will provide a lifetime of fun and enjoyment. Since hearing damage from loud noise is often undetectable until it is too late, this manufacturer and the Electronic Industries AssociationâÂÂs Consumer Electronics Group recommend you avoid prolonged exposure to excessive noise. This list of sound levels is included for your protection. Decibel Level Example 30 Quiet librar y , soft whispers 40 Living room, refrigerator , bedroom away from traffic 50 Light traffic, normal conversation, quiet office 60 Air conditioner at 20 feet, sewing machine 70 V acuum cleaner , hair dr yer , noisy restaurant 80 Average city traffic, garbage disposals, alarm clock at two feet. THE FOLL OWING NOISES CAN BE DANGEROUS UNDER CONST ANT EXPOSURE 90 Subway , motorcycle, truck traffic, lawn mower 100 Garbage truck, chain saw , pneumatic drill 120 Rock band concert in front of speakers, thunderclap 140 Gunshot blast, jet plane 180 Rocket launching pad Information courtesy of the Deafness Research F oundation. POWER-CORD CAUTION Handle the power cord by the plug. Do not pull out the plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a piece of furniture, etc., on the power cord, or pinch the cord. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cords. The power cords should be routed such that they are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can cause a fire or give you an electrical shock. Check the power cord once in a while. When you find it damaged, ask your nearest PIONEER authorized ser vice center or your dealer for a replacement. S002_En This product includes FontAvenueî îÂÂdmlrqîÂÂjgaclacbî `wîÂÂLCAîÂÂampnmp_rgml,îÂÂDmlr?tclscîÂÂgqîÂÂ_îÂÂpcegqrcpcbî rp_bck_piîÂÂmdîÂÂLCAîÂÂAmpnmp_rgml, This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. This product is for general household purposes. Any failure due to use for other than household purposes (such as long-term use for business purposes in a restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which requires repair will be charged for even during the warranty period. K041_En DV48AV_EN.book 4 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ æÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ åÂÂ
5 En Contents 01 Before you start Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 WhatâÂÂs in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Hints on installa tion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Disc/content format playba ck compatib ility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 02 Connections Easy connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Connecting using the S-video output . . . . . 12 Connecting using the component video output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Connecting to an AV receiver . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Connecting using HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 About HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 03 Controls and displays Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Remote cont rol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Setting up the remote to control your TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 04 Getti ng start ed Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Using the on-screen displays . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Setting up the player for your TV . . . . . . . . 21 Setting the language of this playerâÂÂs on-screen displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Playing discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 05 Playing discs Scanni ng discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Playing in slow motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Frame advance/frame reverse . . . . . . . . . . 27 Viewing a JPEG slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Browsing DVD or Video CD disc with the Disc Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Browsing WMA, MP3, MPEG-4 AAC, DivX video, WMV and JPEG files with the Disc Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Looping a se ction of a d isc . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Using repeat play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Using random play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Creating a pro gram list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Searching a disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Switc hing su btitle s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Switching a udio language/channels . . . . . 34 Zooming the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Switc hing came ra angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Displaying disc information . . . . . . . . . . . 34 06 USB playback Using the USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 07 Audio Settings and Video Adjust menus Audio Settings menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Video Adjust menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 08 Initial Settings menu Using the Initial Settings menu . . . . . . . . . 38 Digital Audio Out setti ngs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Video Output settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Language settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Display settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Options settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Parent al Loc k . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Speakers settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 About t he HDMI audio output settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 HDMI output with DVD-Audio an d SACD sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 09 Additional information Taking care of your player an d discs . . . . . 51 Screen sizes and disc formats . . . . . . . . . 52 Resetting the player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 DVD-Video re gions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Selecting languages using th e language code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Language code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Country/Area code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Specific ations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 DV48AV_EN.book 5 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ æÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ åÂÂ
Before you start 01 6 En Chapter 1 Before you start Features ⢠HDMI 1 digital interface The HDMI (H igh-Definitio n Multimed ia Interface) interconnect pro vides high quality digital audio and video, all f rom a single user- friendly connector. HDMI is the first co nsumer electronics interface to support uncompressed standard, enhan ced, or high- definition vi deo plus standard to multi-channel surround sound audio, all using one interface. You can easi ly connect to a HDMI-equ ipped AV receiver or au diovisual devi ce for high quality audio an d video, and communica tion between the video source and (DTV) players, set-top boxes, and other audi ovisual devices is also supported. ⢠PureCine ma Progressive Scan video When connected to a progressive scan- compatible TV or monitor using the component video ou tputs, you can enjoy extremely stable, flicker free images, with the same frame refresh rate as the original movie. ⢠New Disc Navigator with moving pictures The new Disc Na vigator enables you pla y the first few seconds of each title or chapte r in a thumbnail ima ge on screen. ⢠DSP effects for enhanced playb ack See Audio Setti ngs and Video Adjus t menus on page 36. ⢠Picture zoom See Zooming the screen on page 34. ⢠MP3, WMA and MPEG-4 AAC compatibil ity See Compressed audio compatibil ity on page 9. ⢠JPEG compatibili ty See JPEG file co mpatibility on page 10. â¢D i v X î2 video compatibili ty See DivX video compatib ility on page 10. ⢠WMV compatibili ty See CD-R/-RW compatibility on page 8 or About WMV on page 10. ⢠Energy saving design An auto power-off funct i on switches the player into standby if not used for about 30 minutes. ⢠DVD -Audio and SACD compatib le Experience the super high-quality audio performance of DVD-Audio and Sup er Audio CD (SACD). ⢠24-bit/192 kHz compatib le DAC The on-board 24-bit/192 kHz DAC m eans that this player is fully co mpatible with high sampling-rate discs , capable of deliveri ng except ional sound q uality in terms of dynami c range, low-level resolution and high-frequency detail. 1. HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definitio n Multimedia Inte rface are trademar ks or registere d trademarks of HDMI licensing LLC. 2. DivX, DivX Ultra Certified, and associa ted logos are trademar ks of DivX, Inc. and are us ed under license. DV48AV_EN.book 6 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ æÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ åÂÂ
Before you start 01 7 En ⢠Built- in Dolby 1 Digital a nd DTS 2 decoding wi th multichannel outp uts This player features multich annel analog output s for conne ction to an AV amplif ier to give you stunning surrou nd sound from Dolby Digital, D TS and multic hannel DVD-Audi o discs. WhatâÂÂs in the box Please confirm that the following accessories are in the box when you open it. ⢠Remote control ⢠AA/R6P dry cell batteries x 2 ⢠Audio/vid eo cable (r ed/white/yellow plugs) ⢠Operating instructions Putting the batt eries in the remote ⢠Open the battery compartment cover and insert the batteries as shown. Use two AA/R6P batteries and follow the indications ( ï« , ïª ) inside the compartment. Close the cover when yo uâÂÂre finished. Important Incorrect use o f batteries can result in ha zards such as leakage and bursting. Please observe the followin g: ⢠DonâÂÂt mix new and ol d batteries to gether. ⢠DonâÂÂt use differen t kinds of battery togethe r â although they may look similar, different batteries may have different voltages. ⢠Make sure that the plus and minus ends of each battery match the indications in the battery compartme nt. ⢠Remove batteries from equipment that isnâÂÂt going to be used for a month or more. ⢠When disp osing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or environmental pub lic instructio nâÂÂs rules that apply in your country/are a. ⢠Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or other excessively hot pla ce, such as inside a car or n ear a heater. This can cause batteries to leak, overh eat, explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the life or perform ance of batteries. 1. Manufac tured und er licens e from Dolb y Laborato ries. âÂÂDol by âÂÂ, âÂÂPro L ogicâÂÂ, an d the double -D symbol are trademark s of Dolby Laboratories. 2. âÂÂDTSâ and âÂÂDTS Digital Surroundâ are regi stered trad emarks o f DTS, In c. DV48AV_EN.book 7 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ æÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ åÂÂ
Before you start 01 8 En Hints on installation We want you to enjo y using this product for years to come, so please use the following guidelines when choo sing a suit able locatio n: Do... ⢠Use in a wel l-ventilate d room. ⢠Place on a solid, flat, level surface, such as a table, shelf or stereo rack. DonâÂÂt... ⢠Use in a place exposed to h igh temperatures or humid ity, includin g near radiators and other heat-generating appliances. ⢠Place on a window sill or a place where the player will be exposed to direct sunlight. ⢠Use in an excessively dusty or damp environment. ⢠Plac e directly on top of an amplifier, or other component in your stereo system that becomes hot in use. ⢠Use near a television or monitor as you may experience interference â especially if the television uses an in door antenna. ⢠Use in a kitchen or other room wh ere the player may be exposed to smoke or steam. ⢠Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cov er with cloth â this may prevent proper cooling of the unit. ⢠Place on an unsta ble surface, or one that is not la rge enough t o support a ll four of the unitâÂÂs feet. Disc/content format playback compatibility This player is co mpatible with a w ide range of disc types (media) and formats. Playable discs will generally feature one of the followin g logos on the disc and/or di sc packaging. Note however that some disc types, such as recordable CD and DVD , may be in an unplayable form at â see below for further compatib ility informat ion. Please also no te that recordable dis cs cannot be recorded using this player. ⢠This unit wil l play DVD R/ RW discs. ⢠is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Co rporation. ⢠is a trademark of FUJIFILM Corporation. ⢠Als o compatible with KODAK Picture CD About DualDisc playba ck A DualDisc is a new two -sided disc, one side of which co ntains DVD content video, audio, etc. whil e the othe r side cont ains non- DVD content such as digi tal audio material. The non-DVD, audio side of the disc is not compliant with the CD Au dio specification and therefore may not play. The DVD side of a Dua lDisc plays in this product. DVD-Audio content will not play. For more de tailed informa tion on the DualDisc specification, pl ease refer to the disc manufacturer o r disc retailer. CD-R/-RW compatibility ⢠Compatible formats: CD-Au dio, Video CD, ISO 9660 CD-ROM* containing MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC, JPEG o r DivX video/ WMV files * ISO 9660 Leve l 1 or 2 complian t. CD physical format: Mod e1, Mode2 XA Form1. Romeo and Jol iet file sy stems are both compatibl e with this pl ayer. DVD- Video DVD-R DVD-RW Video CD Audio CD CD-R CD-RW DVD-Audio Super Audio CD F ujicolor CD DV48AV_EN.book 8 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ æÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ åÂÂ
Before you start 01 9 En ⢠Mul ti-ses sion playba ck: No ⢠Unfinal ized disc playbac k: No ⢠File structure (may differ): Up to 299 folders on a disc; u p to 648 folders and files (combined) within each folder DVD R/DVD RW compatibility Only DVD R/DVD RW discs recorded in âÂÂVideo Mode (DVD Video Mode)â which have been finalized, can be played back. However, some editing made during the recording may not be played back ac curately. DVD-R/-RW compatibility ⢠Compatibl e formats: DVD-Video, Video Recording (VR)* * Edi t points may not play exactly as edited; screen may go momentaril y blank at edited points. ⢠Unfinalized p layback: N o ⢠MP3/WMA/MPEG-4 AAC/JPEG or DivX video/WMV file playbac k on DVD-R/-RW: No Compressed audio compatibility ⢠Compatible formats: MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 (MP3), Windows Media Audio (WMA), MPEG-4 AAC ⢠Sampling rates: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz ⢠Bit-rates: Any (128 kbps or higher recommended) ⢠VBR (variable bit rate) MP3/WMA/MPEG-4 AAC playback: No ⢠WMA lossless encodi ng compatible: No ⢠DRM (Digital Rights Ma nagement) compatib le: No (DRM-p rotected au dio files will not play in this playerâÂÂsee also DRM in the Glossary on page 59) ⢠File extensions: .mp3, .wma, .m4a (these must be used for the player to recognize MP3, WMA and M PEG-4 AAC files â do not use for other file types) About MPEG-4 AAC Advanced Audio Coding (AAC) is a t the core of the MPEG-4 AAC standard, which incorporates MPEG-2 AAC, forming the basis of the MPEG- 4 audio compr ession techn ology. The file format and extension used de pend on the application used to encode the AA C file. This unit plays back AAC files encoded by iTunes î bearing the extensio n â .m4a âÂÂ. DRM- protected files will not play, and files encoded with some versions of iTunes î may not play, or filenames may display incorrectly. Apple and i Tunes are tradema rks of Apple In c., registere d in the U.S. and other countries. WMA (Windows Media⢠Audio) compatibility This player can playback Windows Media Audio c ontent. WMA i s an acr onym fo r Wind ows Media Audio and refers to an audio compression technology developed by Microsoft Corporation. WMA conten t can be encoded by using Windows Media Pl ayer for Windows XP, Windows Media Player 9 or Windows Media Player 10 series. Windows Media is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation. This product incl udes technology owned by Microsof t Corporation and cannot be used or distributed withou t a license from Microsoft Licensi ng, Inc. About DivX video DivX is a media technology created by DivX, Inc. DivX me dia files co ntain not only video but also include advanced media features like menus, subtitl es, and alt ernate audio tracks. This player can play DivX videos burned on CD-R/-RW/-ROM discs. Keeping the same terminology as DVD-Video, individual DivX video file s are called âÂÂTitlesâÂÂ. Wh en naming files/titles on a CD-R/-RW disc p rior to burning, keep in m ind that by defau lt they will be played in alphabetical order. DV48AV_EN.book 9 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ æÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ åÂÂ
Before you start 01 10 En Displaying external subtitle file s The font sets list ed below are availabl e for external subtitle files. You can see the proper font set on-screen by setting the Sub title Language (in Language set tings on page 41) to match the subtitle file. This player supports t he following language groups: ⢠Some external subtitle files may be displayed incorrectly o r not at all. ⢠For external sub title files th e followin g subtitle format filename extensions are supported (please note that these files are not show n within the disc n avigation menu): .srt, .sub, .ssa, .smi ⢠The filename of the movie file has to be repeated at the beginning of the filename for the external subtitle file. ⢠The number of external subtitle files which can be switched for th e same movie file is limited to a maximum of 10. DivX video compatibility ⢠Official DivX î Ultra Certified produc t. ⢠Plays all versions of DivX î video (including DivX î 6) with enhanced playback of DivX î media file s and the DivX î Media Fo rmat. ⢠File extensions: .avi and .divx (these must be used for the player to recognize DivX video files). Note that all files with the .avi extensi on are recogn ized as MP EG4, but n ot all of these are necess arily DivX video files ã and therefore may not be playa ble on this player. About WMV WMV is an acronym for W indows Media Video and refers to a video compression technology developed by Microsof t Co rporation. WMV content ca n be encode d by using Wind ows Media î Encoder. ⢠This player is comp atible with WMV9 fi les that are encoded by using the Windo ws Media î Encoder 9 Se ries, with .wmv as an extension. ⢠Compatible with size under 720 x 480 pixels. ⢠Advanced Profi le is not supported. ⢠DRM-protect ed video file s will not p lay in this player. JPEG file compatibility ⢠Compat ible formats: Baseline JPEG and EXIF 2.2* still image fi les up to a resolutio n of 3072 x 2048. * File fo rmat used by di gital still ca meras. ⢠Progressive JPEG compatible: No ⢠File extensions: .jpg (m ust be used fo r the player to rec ognize JPEG f iles â do not use for other file typ es) PC-created disc compatibility Discs re corded using a pe rsonal c omputer may not be playable in this unit due to the setting of the application software used to create the disc. In these particula r instances, check with the software publisher for more detailed information. Discs recorded in packet write mode (UD F format) are not c ompatible with this p layer. Check the DVD-R/-RW or CD-R/-RW software disc boxes for additi onal compatibil ity information. Group 1 Albanian (sq), Basque (eu), Catalan (ca), Danish (da), Dutch (nl), English (en), Faroese (fo), Finnish (fi), French (fr), German (de), Ic elandic (is), Irish (ga), Italian (it), Norwegian (no), Portuguese (pt), Rhaeto-Romanic (rm), Scottish (gd), Spanish (es), Swedish (sv) Group 2 Albanian (sq), Croatian (hr), Czech (cs), Hungarian (hu), Polish (pl), Romanian (ro), Slovak (sk), Slovenian (sl) Group 3 Bulgarian (bg ), Byelorussian (be), Macedonian (mk), Russian (ru ), Serbian (sr), Ukrainian (uk) Group 4 Hebrew (iw), Yiddish (ji) Group 5 Tu rkish (tr) DV48AV_EN.bo ok 10 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connections 02 11 En Chapter 2 Connections Easy connections Important ⢠Before making or changing any connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cable from the AC outlet. ⢠The setup desc ribed here is a bas ic setup that allows you to pl ay discs using just the cables supplied with the player. In this setup, stereo au dio is played through the spea kers in your TV. ⢠This player is equipped with copy protection technology. Do not connect this player to your TV via a VCR using audio/video or S- video cables , as the picture from th is player will not appear properly on you r TV. (This player may also not be compatible with some combination TV/VCRs for the same reason; ref er to the manufacturer for m ore information.) 1 Connect the VIDEO OUT and AUDIO OUT (5.1ch)/AUDIO OUT L/R jac ks to a set of A/V inputs on your TV. Use the supplied audio/video cabl e, connecting the red and white plugs to the audio outputs and the yellow plu g to the video output. Make sure you m atch up the left and right audio outputs with th eir corresponding inputs for correc t stereo sound. See below if you want to use a component or S-video cable for the video co nnection. 2 Plug into a power outlet. Note ⢠Before unplugging the player fro m the power outlet, make sure you first switch it into standby using eith er the front panel ïµ STANDBY/ON button, or the remote control, and wait of th e -OFF- mess age to disappear from the playerâÂÂs display. ⢠For the above reasons, do no t plug this player into a switche d power supply found on some amplifiers and AV receiver s. P R P B Y COMPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT (5.1ch) DIGITAL AUDIO OUT OPTICAL SL SR HDMI OUT SW C L R COAXIAL To audio/video inputs Y ellow White Red TV To power outlet DV48AV_EN.bo ok 11 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connections 02 12 En Connecting using the S-video output If your TV (or other equipment) has an S-video (S1) input, you can use the S-video output on this player instead of the standard (composite) output for a better quality picture. ⢠Use an S-video cab le (not supplied) to connect the S-VIDEO OUT to an S-vide o input on your TV (or mo nitor or AV receiver). Line up the small triangle above the jack with th e s a m e ma r k o n th e p l u g b e f o r e p l u g g in g i n . Connecting using the component video output You can use the co mponent video output instead of the standard video out jack to connect this player to your TV (or other equipm ent). This sh ould give you the best quality picture from the th ree types of video output availabl e. ⢠Use a component vi deo cable (not supplied) to conn ect the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks to a component video input on you r TV, monitor or AV receiver. P R P B Y COMPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT (5.1ch) SL SR HDMI OUT SW C L R TV To S-video input P R P B Y COMPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT (5.1ch) SL SR HDMI OUT SW C L R TV To component video input DV48AV_EN.bo ok 12 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connections 02 13 En Watching progressive scan video from the component video outputs This player can output progressive scan video from the component video o utput. Compared to interlace video, pr ogressive scan video effectively doubles the scanning rate of the picture, result ing in a very st able, flicker-f ree image. To set up the player for use with a progressive scan TV, see Video Output settings on page 40. When the player is set to output progressive scan video, the PRGSVE indicator lights in the front pan el displa y. Important ⢠If you connect a TV that is no t compatibl e with a progressive scan signal and switch the player to progressive, yo u will not be able to see any pi cture at all. In th is case, switch everything off and reco nnect using the supplied video cable (see Easy connections on page 11), then switch back to Interlace (see below). Switch ing the video output to interlace using the front panel controls Switch the player to standby then, using the front p anel cont rols, pre ss ïµ STANDBY/O N while pressing ï¯ to switch the player back to Interlace . ⢠If the player is connected using HDMI, disconnect the HDMI cable before resetting the player to interlace out put. (If left connected, the HDMI output resolution will be reset to its defaul t â see Resetting the output resolution to the default setting with HDMI connection on page 16.) Connecting to an AV receiver You can connec t this player to your AV receiver using the multicha nnel analog outp uts or one of the dig ital outputs. In addition to these connections, you sho uld also connect th e 2 channel analog o utputs for compat ibility wi th all dis cs. YouâÂÂll probably also want to connect a video output to your AV receiver. You can use any of the video outputs available on this player (the illustration shows a st andard (composite) connectio n). 1 Connect the an alog AUDIO OUT (5.1ch)/AUDIO OUT L/R and VIDEO OUT jacks on thi s player to a se t of analog au dio and video inpu ts on your AV receiver. 2 Connect the AV receiverâÂÂs vi deo output to a video inpu t on your TV. You can also use the S-video or component video jacks to connect to the AV re ceiver if you prefer. Tip ⢠You usually have to connect the same kind of video cable be tween your DVD player and AV receiver, and between your AV receiver and TV. ïµï STANDBY/ON USB DVD/USB HDMI ï§ ïÂÂ¥ ï¯ï° ïµ STANDBY/ON ï¯ P R P B Y COMPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT (5.1ch) SL SR HDMI OUT SW C L R AV r eceiver To audio/video inputs DV48AV_EN.bo ok 13 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connections 02 14 En Connecting the multichannel analog outputs If your AV rece iver has 5.1 channel analog inputs, we recommend co nnecting this player to it usin g the mult ichannel anal og outputs . Doing this will ensure that you can enjoy all kinds of disc, including Dolby Digi tal and DTS DVD-Video discs, as well as high sampling rate and multic hannel DVD-Audio and SACD discs. ⢠Connect the multi -channel audio outputs on this player to the mul ti-channel audio inputs on your AV receiver. ItâÂÂs convenient to use three stereo audio cables; one for the FRONT , one for th e SURROUN D and one for the CENTER and SUBWOOFER channe ls. You can also use the S-video or co mponent video jacks to connect to th e AV receiver if you prefer. Tip ⢠After connecting up and switc hing on, you should change the Audio Output Mode setting in the Initial Setup menu from the default 2 Channel to 5.1 Ch anne l . See also Audio Output Mo de on page 45. Connecting the digital output This player h as both o ptical and coax ial-type digital audio outp uts for connection to an AV receiver. Connect whichever is co nvenient. Depending on the capabilities of you r AV receiver, you might have to set up th is player to outpu t only digit al audio in a compatib le format . See Digital Audi o Out settings on page 39 and refer to the operating instructio ns that came with yo ur AV receiver. Note that SACD au dio is not output through these jack s, so this connec tion shou ld be in additi on to, rather than instead of, a 5.1 channel analo g connection. ⢠Connect one of the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jacks on this play er to a digital input on your AV recei ver. For an optical conn ection, use an optical ca ble (not supplied) to connect the OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OU T jack to an optica l input on your AV receiver. For a co axial connecti on, use a coaxi al cable (similar to the supplied video cable) to connect the COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO O UT jack to a coaxial i nput on your A V receiver. P R P B Y COMPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT (5.1ch) SL SR HDMI OUT SW C L R AV r eceiver To multi-channel audio inputs DIGITAL AUDIO OUT OPTICAL COAXIAL AV r eceiver To coaxial/optical digital input DV48AV_EN.bo ok 14 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connections 02 15 En Connecting using HDMI If you have a HDMI equipped monitor or display, you can connect it to this player using a commercially av ailable HDMI cabl e. The HDMI connect or outputs uncompressed digital video, as well as almo st every kind of digital audio that the player i s compatible wi th, including DVD-Video, DVD-Audio (see belo w for limitations), SACD, Video CD, CD, WMA , MP3, MPEG-4 AAC, DivX video an d WMV. ⢠Use an HDMI cable to connect the HDMI OUT interconnect on th is player to an HDMI intercon nect on a HDMI- compatible display. The arrow on the cable connector body should be face up for co rrect alignment with the connector on the player . Note ⢠Thi s unit has been designed to be compliant wit h HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Int erface). Dep ending on the component you ha ve connected, using a DVI connection may result in unreli able signal transfers. ⢠When you change the component connected to the HDMI output, you will also need to change the HDMI settin gs to match the new compon ent (see HDMI Out on page 39, HDMI Resolution and HDMI Color o n page 40 to do this). However, the settings for each co mponent are then stored in memory (for up to 2 components). ⢠The HDMI con nection is c ompatible w ith 2 channel linea r PCM signals (44.1 kHz to 192 kHz, 16 bit/20 bit/24 bit), and Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG audio bit stream, multi channel DS D, and multi c hannel linear PCM signals, (5.1 chan nel si gnals up to 96 kHz, 16 bit/20 bit/24 bit). P R P B Y COMPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT (5.1ch) SL SR HDMI OUT SW C L R HDMI-compatible display To HDMI interconnect DV48AV_EN.bo ok 15 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connections 02 16 En About HDMI HDMI (Hi gh-Definit ion Multim edia Inte rface) supports both video an d audio on a sin gle digital connection for use with DVD players, DTV, set-top boxes, and other AV devices. HDMI was developed to provide the technologies of High-b andwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP) a s well as Di gital Visual Interface (DVI) in one specification . HDCP is u sed to prot ect digi tal conten t transmitted and received by DVI-complia nt displays. HDMI has the capability to support standard, enhanced, or high-defin ition video plus standard to multi-channel surround-so und audio. HDMI features include unco mpressed digital video, a bandwidth of up to five gigaby tes per sec ond (wit h HDTV sign als), on e connector (instead of several cables and connectors), and communication between the AV source and AV devices such as DTVs. Resetting the output resolution to the default setting w ith HDMI connection Switch the player to standby then, using the front p anel cont rols, pre ss ïµ STANDBY/O N while pressing ï¯ to switch the player back to 480P . You can also use the HDMI RESOLUTION button on the remote control to sw itch the player back to 480P . ïµï STANDBY/ON USB DVD/USB HDMI ï§ ïÂÂ¥ ï¯ï° ïµ STANDBY/ON ï¯ HDMI RESOLUTION DV48AV_EN.bo ok 16 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 17 En Chapter 3 Controls and displays Front panel 1 ïµ STANDBY/ON (pa ge 20) 2 Disc tray 3T O P M E N U (page 24) 4 ENTER & cursor buttons (page 20) 5M E N U (page 24) 6 RETURN (page 24) 7H O M E M E N U (page 20) 8D i s p l a y 9 ï¨ OPEN/CLOSE (page 22) 10 ï¤ (page 23) 11 ïÂÂ¥ (page 23) 12 ï§ (page 23) 13 ï¯ and ï° (page 23) 14 HDMI indi cator Lights when this pla yer is recognized by another HDMl or DVI/HD CP compatible component. 15 DVD/USB (page 35) 16 USB port (Typ e A) (page 35) 17 RW C ompatib le (page 9) MENU TOP MENU ïµï STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE USB DVD/USB HDMI HOME MENU RETURN ï§ ï¨ ïÂÂ¥ ï¤ ï¯ï° ENTER 2 3 4 5 1 7 6 8 10 9 17 14 15 16 11 12 13 DV48AV_EN.bo ok 17 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 18 En Remote control Tip ⢠All butt ons glow slightly in the dark for ease of use. 1 ïµ STANDBY/ON (page 2 0) 2 FL DIMMER Press to change the display bright ness. 3 Number buttons (page 23) 4C L E A R (page 32) 5 AUDIO (page 34) 6 SUBTITLE (page 33) 7T O P M E N U (pa ge 24) 8 ENTER & cursor buttons (page 20) 9H O M E M E N U (pa ge 20) 10 SURROUND (page 36) 11 PLAY MODE (page 30) 12 ï and ï³/ï± (page 23, 27) 13 ï¤ PLAY (page 23) 14 ï¯ PREV (page 23) 15 ïÂÂ¥ PAUSE (page 23) 16 ï¨ OPEN/CLOSE (page 22) 17 HDMI COLOR (page 40) 18 HDMI RESOLUTION /â (page 16, 40) 19 EN TER (page 20) 20 DVD/USB (page 35) 21 ANGLE (page 34) 22 MENU (page 24) 23 RETURN (page 20) 24 ZOOM (page 34) 25 DISPLAY (page 34) 26 ï® and ï²/ï´ (page 23, 27) 27 ï° NEXT (page 23) 28 ï§ STOP (page 23) 29 TV CONTROL (page 19) DVD STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE TOP MENU RETURN MENU HOME MENU HDMI COLOR AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE DVD/ USB PLAY MODE SURROUND ZOOM DISPL AY ENTER ENTER TV CONTROL PLAY VOLUME CHANNEL ïµ ï¨ INPUT SELECT ïµ FL DIMMER CLEAR HDMI RESOLUTION PA USE NEXT PREV STOP ï³ï¯ï± ï²ï¯ï´ 2 1 7 8 12 4 5 9 11 13 16 20 18 17 22 23 24 25 3 6 10 14 15 19 21 26 27 28 29 DV48AV_EN.bo ok 18 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 19 En Using the re mote control Keep in mind the following when usin g the remote contro l: ⢠Make sure that there are no obstacles between t he remote an d the remote sensor on the unit. ⢠The remote has a range of about 23 feet. ⢠Remote operation may become unreliable if strong s unlight or fl uorescent lig ht is shining on the unitâÂÂs rem ote sensor. ⢠Remote controllers for different devices can interfere with ea ch other. Avoid us ing remotes for other equipm ent located close to this unit. ⢠Replace the batteries when you no tice a fall off in th e operating range of the remote. Setting up the remote to control your TV You can use the supplied remote to control your TV. To be able to use this feature yo u first have to program the remo te with a maker code from the table below. 1 Press and ho ld down the CLEAR button, then enter the m aker code for your TV. See the table below for the list of maker codes. If there is more than on e code given for your make, input the first one in the l ist. ⢠If the makerâÂÂs name of you r TV doesnâÂÂt appear in the table below, yo u will not be able to use this remote to control your TV. 2P r e s s ïµ TV to check that the remote works with your TV. If the remote is set up correctly, the TV should switch on/off. If it doesnâÂÂt and th ere is another code given for your mak er, repeat step 1 with a new code. Using t he TV remote control buttons The table below shows how to use this remote control with your TV. Button What it does ïµ TV P ress to switch the TV on/off (standby) INPUT SELECT P ress to change the TVâÂÂs video input VOLUME /â Use to adjust the TV volume CHANNEL /â Use to change TV channels Maker Code Aiwa 38 Fu n a i 3 6 GE 11, 28 General 34 Goldstar 10, 23 Grandiente 30 Hitachi 06, 24, 25, 32 Magnavox 12, 29 Mitsubishi 09 NEC 37 P anasonic 08, 22, 41 Philips 0 7 P ioneer 00, 35, 40, 44 RCA 01, 15, 16, 17, 18 Samsung 73, 75 Sanyo 14, 21 Sharp 02, 19, 27 Sony 04 T oshiba 05, 26, 31, 43 JVC 13, 33, 42 Zenith 03, 20 DV48AV_EN.bo ok 19 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 20 En Chapter 4 Getting started Switching on After making sure that everything is conne cted properly and th at the player is plugged in, press ïµ STANDBY/ON on the front pane l or remote control to switch the player on . Also, switch on your TV a nd make sure that it is set to the input you connected the DVD player to. FAQ ⢠My DV D player switches on but there i s nothing disp layed on my TV. Make sure th at the TV is set to th e correct video input (not a TV channel) . For example, if you conne cted this player to the VIDEO 1 inputs on your TV, switch your TV to VIDEO 1 . Note ⢠This player features a screen saver and an auto power of f function. If the pla yer is stopped and no button is pressed for around five minutes, the screen saver starts. If the disc tray is c losed but no disc is playing and no con trol is press ed for about 30 minutes, the player automatically goes into standby. Using the on-screen displays For ease of use, this pla yer makes extensive use of graphical on-screen displays (OSDs). All th e screens are navigate d in basically the same way, using the cursor buttons ( ï©/ïª /ï«/ ï¬ ) to change th e highlighted item and pressing ENTE R to select it. Note ⢠From here on in this manual, the word âÂÂselectâ generally m eans use the cursor buttons to highlig ht an item on- screen, then press ENT ER . ïµï STANDBY/ON USB DVD/USB HDMI ï¯ï° ïµ STANDBY/ON Button What it does HOME MENU Display/exit the on-screen display . ï©/ïª/ï«/ï¬ Changes the highlighted menu item. ENTER Selects the highlighted menu item (both ENTER buttons on the remote work in exactly the same way). RETURN R eturns to the main menu without saving changes. RETURN HOME MENU ENTER ENTER MENU TOP MENU OPEN/CLOSE HOME MENU RETURN ï¨ ï¤ ENTER ENTER DV48AV_EN.bo ok 20 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 21 En Setting up the player for your TV If you have a wide screen (16:9) TV, you should setup the player so that the picture will be presented correctly. If you have a conventional (4:3) TV, you can leave the player on the default setting and move on to the next section . 1 Press HOME MENU an d select âÂÂInitial SettingsâÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂTV Scree nâ from the âÂÂVideo Outputâ settings. 3 If you have a widescree n (16:9) TV, select âÂÂ16:9 (Wid e)â or âÂÂ16:9 (Compressed)âÂÂ. If you have a con ventional (4:3) TV, you can change the setting from 4:3 (Let ter Box) to 4:3 (Pan & Scan) if you prefer. See Vide o Output settings on page 40 for more details. 4 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu screen. Setting the language of this playerâÂÂs on-screen displays This sets the language of the playerâÂÂs on- screen displays. 1 Press H OME MENU and sel ect âÂÂInitial SettingsâÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂOSD Languageâ from the âÂÂDisplayâ s ettings. 3 Select a l anguage. The on-sc reen language w ill change according to your selection. 4 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu screen. Initial Settings Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers TV Screen Component Out HDMI Resolution HDMI Color 4:3 (Letter Box) 4:3 (Pan&Scan) 16:9 (Wide) 16:9 (Compressed) Initial Settings Initial Settings Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers OSD Language Angle Indicator English français Deutsch Italiano Español Initial Settings DV48AV_EN.bo ok 21 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 22 En Playing discs The basic playba ck controls for play ing DVD, CD, SACD, Video CD, DivX video/WMV and MP3/WMA/MPEG-4 AAC discs are covered here. Further functions are detailed in the n ext chapter. For details on playing JPEG picture discs, see Viewing a JPE G slidesh ow on page 28. Important ⢠Throughout this manual, the term âÂÂDVDâ means DVD-Video, DVD-Audio and DVD-R/-RW. If a fun ction is specific to a particula r kind of DV D disc, it is specified. 1 If the player isnâÂÂt already on, press ïµ STANDBY/ON to switch it o n. If youâÂÂre playin g a DVD, disc con taining DivX video/WMV files or Video C D , a l s o t u r n o n y o u r TV and make sure that it is se t to the correct video input. 2P r e s s ï¨ OPEN/CLOSE to open the di sc tray. 3 Load a disc. Load a disc with the label side facing up, us ing the disc tray guide to a lign the disc (if youâÂÂre loading a double -sided DVD disc, load it wit h the side you want to play fac e down). 4 Press ï¤ (play) to start playback. If youâÂÂre playing a DVD or Video CD, an on- screen menu may appear. See DVD-Vi deo and DivX disc menus on p age 24 and Video CD PBC menus o n p a g e 2 5 f o r m o r e o n h o w t o n a v i g a t e these. ⢠If youâÂÂre playing a co ntaining DivX video/ WMV files or MP3/WMA /MPEG-4 AAC audio files, it may take a few seconds before playback sta rts, etc. This is normal. ⢠Please see Disc/cont ent format playback compa tibilit y on page 8 if you want to play a DualDisc (DVD/CD hybrid disc) . Note ⢠You may find with some DVD discs that some playback controls donâÂÂt work i n certain parts of the disc. This is not a malfunction. ⢠If a disc cont ains a mixt ure of movie (DivX video/WMV) and other media file types (MP3, for example), first select wh ether to play the movie files ( DivX/WMV )o r the other media file types ( MP3/WMA/MPEG- 4 AAC/JPEG ) from the on-screen display. STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE ENTER ENTER PLAY ïµ ï¨ PAUS E STOP ï³ï¯ï± ï²ï¯ï´ DV48AV_EN.bo ok 22 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 23 En Basic playback controls The table below shows the basic controls on the remote for playin g discs. The foll owing chapter covers other playback fe atures in more deta il. Resume and Last Memory With the exception of DVD-Audio and SACD discs, when you stop playback of a DVD, CD, or Video CD or DivX video/WMV discs, RESUME is shown in the dis play indicat ing that you can resume playba ck again from that point. If the di sc tray is not opened, the next time you start playback the display shows R ESUME and playback resumes from the resume point. (If you want to clear the resume point, press ï§ (st op) whil e RESUME is displayed.) With DVDs and Video CDs, if you take th e disc out of the player after stop ping playback, the last play position is stored in memory. If the next disc you load is the same one, the display shows LAST MEM and playback wi ll resume. For DVD-Video discs, the player sto res the play position of the last five discs. When one of these discs is next loaded, you ca n resume playback. Note ⢠The Last Memory function doesnâÂÂt work with VR format DVD-R/-RW, DVD-Audio or SACD disc s. ⢠If you donâÂÂt need the Last Memory function when you stop a disc, you can press ï¨ OPEN/CLOSE to stop playback and open the disc tray. Button What it does ï¤ Starts playback. If the display shows RESUME or LAST MEM playback starts from the resume or last memory point (see also Resume and Last Memory below. ) ïÂÂ¥ P auses a disc thatâÂÂs playing, or restarts a paused disc. ï§ Stops playback. See also Resume and Last Memory below. ï (remote only) P ress to start fast reverse scanning. Pr e ss ï¤ (play) to resume normal playback. ï® (remote only) P ress to start fast forward scanning. Pr e ss ï¤ (play) to resume normal playback. ï¯ Skips to the start of the current track, title or chapter , then to previous tracks/titl es/chapters. ï° Skips to the next track, title or chapt er . Numbers (remote only) Use to enter a title/chapter/track number . P ress ENTER to select. ⢠If the disc is stopped, playback starts from the selected title (for DVD), group (for DVD-Audio) or track (for CD/SACD/Video CD). ⢠If the disc is playing, playback jumps to the start of the selected title (VR mode DVD -RW), chapter (DVD - V ideo) or track (DVD -Audio*/ SACD/CD/Video CD). *within the current group DV48AV_EN.bo ok 23 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 24 En DVD-Video and DivX disc menus Some DivX me dia files and ma ny DVD-Vide o and DVD-Audio discs feat ure menus from which you can select what you want to watch. They may also give a ccess to additional features, such as subtit le and audio language selection, or specia l features such as slideshow s. See the disc packaging fo r details. Sometimes DivX and DVD-Video menus are displayed automatically when yo u start playback; others onl y appear when you press MENU or TOP MENU . Important ⢠Some DVD-Audio discs feature a âÂÂbonus groupâÂÂ. To play this g roup you first have to input a password, which you can find on the discâÂÂs packaging. Use the number buttons to input the password. TOP MENU RETURN MENU ENTER ENTER Button What it does TOP MENU Displays the âÂÂtop menuâ of a DVD disc â this varies with the disc. MENU Displays a DVD disc (or DivX media files) menu â this varies with the disc and may be the same as the âÂÂtop menuâÂÂ. ï©/ïª/ï«/ï¬ Moves the cursor around the screen. ENTER Selects the current menu option. RETURN R eturns to the previously dis- played menu screen. On some DVD-Audi o discs featuring brows- able pictures, press to display the browser screen. Numbers (remote only) Highlights a numbered menu option (some discs only). P ress ENTER to select. DV48AV_EN.bo ok 24 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 25 En Video CD PBC menus Some Video CDs have menus from which you can choose what you want to watch. These are called PBC (Playback co ntrol) menus. You can play a PBC Video CD without having to navigate the PBC menu by starting play back using a number button to select a track, rather than the ï¤ (play) button. FAQ ⢠Afte r I load a DVD disc, it ej ects automatically after a few seconds! Most likely, the disc is the wrong region for your player. The region numbe r should be printed on the disc; check it agains t the region number of the player (which you can find on the rea r panel). See also DVD- Video regions on page 53. If the region number is OK , it may be that the disc is damaged or dirty. Clean t he disc and look for signs of damage. S ee also Taking care of your player and discs on page 51. ⢠Why wonâÂÂt the disc I loaded play? First check that you loaded the disc the right way up (label side up), and that itâÂÂs clean and undamaged. See Taking care of your player and disc s on page 51 for information on cleaning discs. If a disc loaded cor r ectly wonâÂÂt play, itâÂÂs probabl y an incomp atible for mat or disc type, such as DVD-ROM . See Disc/content format playback compatibility on page 8 for more on disc compatibil ity. ⢠I have a widescreen TV so why are there black bars at the top and bottom of the screen when I play some disc s? Some movie formats are such that e ven when played on a widescreen TV, black bars are necessa ry at the top and bo ttom of the screen. This is not a malfunction. ⢠I have a standard (4:3 ) TV and set the player to show wide screen DVDs in pan & scan format, so why do I still ge t black bars top and bottom with some discs? Some discs override the display preferences of the player, so even if you have 4:3 (Pan & Scan) selected, those discs will still be shown in letter box format. This is not a malf unction. Button What it does RETURN Displays the PBC menu. Numbers (remote only) Use to enter a numbered menu option . P ress ENTER to select. ï¯ Displays the previou s menu page (if there is one). ï° Displays the next menu page (if there is one). RETURN ENTER ENTER PLAY CLEAR DV48AV_EN.bo ok 25 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 26 En ⢠IâÂÂve connec ted to a HDMI com patible component but I canâÂÂt get any signal and the front panel HDMI indicator wonâÂÂt l ight! Make sure that youâÂÂve selected this player as the HDMI input in the settings for the component youâÂÂre usin g. You may need to refer to the instruction manual of the component to do th is. See Connecting using HDMI on page 15 for more on HD MI compatib ility. ⢠Thereâ s no picture from the HDMI output! This player cannot display pictures from DVI compatible sourc es. See Connecting using HDMI on page 15 for more on HD MI compatib ility. Make sure the resolutio n on this player matches that of the component you h ave connected using HD MI. See HDMI Resolut ion on page 40 to change the HDMI resolution. ⢠My AV receiv er is defi nitely c ompatible with 96 kHz/88.2 kHz Linear PCM au dio, but it doesnâÂÂt seem to work with this p layer. WhatâÂÂs wrong? For digital c opy-protection purposes, some 96 kHz/88.2 kHz DVD discs only output digital audio downsample d to 48 kHz/ 44.1 kHz. Th is is not a m alfunction . To fully take adva ntage of the high sampling rate audio, co nnect the analog audio outputs to your amplifier/receiver. ⢠Why canâÂÂt I hear SACD audio through the digital output s? SACD digit al audio is only availabl e through th e HDMI output s when connected to an HDMI-co mpatible amp that can handle pr otected audio contents. Some DVD-A udio discs too only outp ut audio through the a nalog outputs. ⢠I s it better to li sten to DVD-Audio discs through the analog outputs? Some DVD-Audio discs do not output anything through the digital outputs, and multichannel discs are downmixed to stereo for the digital ou tput. In addition, high sampling rate DVD-Audio discs (higher than 96 kHz) automatically downsample audio output from the digital outputs. Using the multichannel analog audi o outputs for DVD-Audio have none of these limitations. ⢠My DVD- Audio disc starts playi ng, but then suddenly stops! The disc may have been illegally copied. DV48AV_EN.bo ok 26 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 27 En Chapter 5 Playing di scs Note ⢠Many of the functions covered in th is chapter app ly to DVD and S ACD discs, Video CDs, CDs, DivX video/WMV and MP3/W MA/MPEG-4 AAC/ JPEG discs, altho ugh the exact ope ration of some varies slightl y with the kind of disc loaded. ⢠Some DVDs restrict the use of some functions (rando m or repeat, for exampl e) in some or all parts of the disc. This is not a malfunction . ⢠When playing Vi deo CDs, some of the functions are no t available du ring PBC playback. If you want to use them, start the disc playing using a number button to select a track. Scanning discs You can fast-scan discs forward or backward at four different speeds (only one speed fo r DivX video/WMV). 1 Durin g playback , press ï or ï® to start scanning. ⢠There is no sound while scan ning DVDs (including DVD-Au di o), DivX video/WMV and Video CDs. 2 Press repeatedly to increase the scanning speed. ⢠The scanning speed is shown on-screen. 3 To resume normal playback, press ï¤ (play) . ⢠Whe n scanning a Video CD playing in P BC mode or a MP3/WMA/M PEG-4 AAC track, playback automatica lly resumes at the end or beginning of the tr ack. ⢠Depending on the disc, normal playba ck may automatically resume when a new chapter is rea ched on a DVD disc. Playing in slow motion You can play DVD-Videos and DVD-R/-RW at four different slow motion speeds, for wards and backwards. Video CDs and DivX video/ WMV can b e played at four different forward slow motion speeds. 1 During playback, press ïÂÂ¥ (pause). 2 Press an d hold ï³/ï± or ï²/ï´ un til slow motion pl ayback starts. ⢠The sl ow motion speed is shown on- screen. ⢠T here is no so und during sl ow motion playback. 3 Press repeatedly to change the slow motion speed. 4 To resume normal playback, press ï¤ (play). ⢠Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached. Frame advance/frame reverse You can advanc e or back up D VD-Video and DVD-R/-RW discs frame-by- frame. With Video CDs and DivX video/WMV file you can only use frame advance. 1 During playback, press ïÂÂ¥ (pause). 2 Press ï³/ï± or ï²/ï´ to reverse or advance a frame at a time. 3 To resume normal playback, press ï¤ (play). ⢠Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached. DV48AV_EN.bo ok 27 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 28 En Viewing a JPEG slideshow After loadin g a CD/CD-R/- RW containing JPEG picture files, press ï¤ (play) to start a slideshow from the first folder/picture on the disc. The player displays the pictures in ea ch folder in alphabetical order . ⢠If the folder contains MP3/WMA/ MPEG-4 AAC files, playback of the slideshow and MP3/WMA/ MPEG-4 AAC file repeats. During the audio playback, yo u can still u se the skip ( ï¯/ ï° ), scan ( ïÂÂ/ï® ) and pause (ïÂÂ¥ ) functions. Pictures are automatically adjusted so th at they fill as much of the screen as possible (if the aspect ratio of the picture is different to your TV screen you may n otice black bars at the sides, or at the top and bottom of the screen). While the slideshow is running: Note ⢠The time it takes for the player to load a file increases with large file sizes. Browsing DVD or Video CD disc with the Disc Navigator Use the Disc Navigator to browse thro ugh the contents of a DVD-Video, VR mode DVD-R/-RW or Video CD disc to find the pa rt you want to play. Important ⢠You canâÂÂt use th e Disc Naviga tor with Video CDs in PB C mode. 1 During playback, press HOME MENU and select âÂÂDisc Navi gatorâ from the on- screen menu. 2 Select a view option. The options available depend on the kind of disc loa ded and whether the disc is playin g or not, but include: ⢠Title â Titles from a DVD-Video di sc. ⢠Chapter â Chapters from the current title of a DVD-Video disc. ⢠Track â Tracks fro m a Video CD disc. ⢠Time â Thu mbnails f rom a Video CD disc at 10 minute intervals. ⢠Original: Title â O riginal ti tles from a VR mode DVD-R/-RW disc. ⢠Play List: Ti tle â Play List titles from a VR mode DVD-R/-RW disc. ⢠Original: Time â Thumbnails from the Original content at 10 minute intervals. ⢠Play List: Ti me â Thu mbnails f rom the Play List at 10 minute intervals. Button What it does ïÂÂ¥ P auses the slideshow ; press again to restart. ï¯ Displays the previous picture. ï° Display s the next pict ure. ï«/ï¬ P auses the slides how and rotates the displayed picture 90ú (counter) clockwise. (P ress ï¤ (play) to restart slideshow .) ï©/ïª P auses the slideshow and flips the displayed picture horizontally or vertically . (P ress ï¤ (play) to restart slideshow .) ZOOM P auses the slideshow and zooms the picture. P ress again to toggle between 1x, 2x and 4x zoom. (P ress ï¤ (play) to restart slideshow .) MENU Displays the Disc Navigator screen (see below). Disc Navigator Di sc Navigator Title Chapter DV48AV_EN.bo ok 28 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 29 En The screen shows up to six moving thumbnail images displa yed one after an other. To displa y the previous/next six thumbnails, press ï¯ / ï° (you donâÂÂt h ave to wait for all the thumbna ils to finis h playing to display t he previous/ne xt page). 3 Sele ct the thum bnai l image for what you want to pl ay. You can use either the cursor bu ttons ( ï©/ïª/ ï«/ï¬ ) and ENTER to select a thumbnail, or the numbe r buttons. To select us ing the number bu ttons, enter a two-digit number then press ENTER . Tip ⢠Another way to find a particular place on a disc is to use one of the search m odes. See Searching a disc on page 33. Browsing WMA, MP3, MPEG-4 AAC, DivX video, WMV and JPEG files with the Disc Navigator Use the Disc Navi gator to find a particular file or folder by filename. Note that if there a re other types of files on the same disc, these will not be displayed in the Disc Navigator. 1 Press HOME MENU and s elect âÂÂDisc Navigatorâ from the on-screen menu. 2 Use the cursor butt ons ( ï©/ïª/ï«/ï¬ ) and EN TER to n avigate . Use the cursor up/down buttons ( ï©/ïª ) to move up and down th e folder/fil e list. Use the cursor left button ( ï« ) to return to the parent f older. Use ENTER or cursor right ( ï¬ ) t o open a highlighted folder. ⢠You can also return to the parent folder by going t o the top of th e list to the â .. â folder, then pressing ENTER . ⢠When a JPEG file is hi ghlighted, a thumbnail image is displayed on the right. 3 To pla y the highli ghted track or DivX video/ WMV file or disp lay the high lighted JPEG file, press ENTER. ⢠When a MP3/WMA/MPEG-4 A AC or DivX video/WMV file i s selected, playback begins, starting with the selected f ile, and continues until the end o f the folder. ⢠When a JPEG fi le is selected, a slideshow begins, s tarting wi th that file, a nd continues to the end of the folder. 0 1 04 02 05 03 0 6 Di sc Navigator: Title 0 1 - 49: - - 00:00 / 00:00 0k bp s Fol der 1 Fol der2 Fol der3 Fol der4 File 1 File2 File3 File4 File5 Fol der 2 00:00 / 00:00 0k bp s DV48AV_EN.bo ok 29 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 30 En Tip ⢠You can also play a JPEG slideshow while listening to MP3/WMA/M PEG-4 AAC playback. S imply selec t the audio file yo u w a n t t o l i s t e n t o f o l l o w e d b y t h e J P E G f r o m which you want the slideshow to start. Playback of both the slideshow and the audio files rep eats. Pl ayback co ntrols are effective for the JPEG slideshow only. ⢠To play the contents of the whole disc rather than just the current folder, exit the Disc Navi gator an d start p layback us ing the ï¤ (pla y) button . Looping a section of a disc The A-B Repeat function allows you to specify two p oints (A and B) with in a tr ack (CD , Vide o CD) or title (DVD-Vid eo and DVD-RW) that form a loop which is pla yed over and over. ⢠You canâÂÂt use A-B Repeat with DVD-Audio, SACD, Video CDs i n PBC mode, or M P3/ WMA/MPEG-4 AAC/DivX video/WMV files. 1 During pl ayback, press PLAY MODE and select â A-B Repeatâ from the li st of functions on the left. 2 Press ENTER on âÂÂA(Start Point)â to set the loop start point. 3 Press ENTER on âÂÂB(End Point)â to set the loop end po int. After pressing ENTER , playback jumps back to the start point and plays the loop. 4 To resume no rmal pl ayback, select âÂÂOffâ from the menu. Using repeat play There are various repeat play optio ns, d ep e n d i n g o n t h e ki n d o f d i s c l oa d e d . It â s a ls o possibl e to use repea t play toge ther with program p lay to repeat the tracks/c hapters in the program list (see Creati ng a program list on page 32). Important ⢠Yo u canâÂÂt use Re peat play with Video CDs in PBC mode, or with M P3/WMA/MPEG-4 AAC discs. ⢠You canâÂÂt use repeat and ra ndom play at the same time. 1 During playback, press PLAY MODE and select â Repeatâ from the list o f functions on the left. 2 Select a repeat play option. If program pl ay is active, select Pro gram Repeat to repeat the program list, or Repeat Off to cancel. The repeat options ava ilable depend on the kind of disc loaded. For example, for DVD- Video and DVD-RW discs, you can select Title Repeat or Chapter Repeat (or Repeat Off ). ⢠For DVD-Audio discs, select Group Repeat or Track Repeat (or Repeat O ff ). ⢠For SACDs,CDs and Video CDs, select Disc Repeat or Track Repeat (or Repeat Off ). A(Start Point) B(End Point) Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Title Repeat Chapter Repeat Repeat Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Title Repeat Chapter Repeat Repeat Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode DV48AV_EN.bo ok 30 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 31 En ⢠For DivX video/WMV discs, select Title Repeat , and for some DivX media files, select Chapter Rep eat (or Repeat Off ). Using random play Use the random play func tion to play titles or chapters (DVD-Video), Gr oups (DVD-Audio), or tracks (DVD-Aud io, SACD, CD, Video CD) at random. (N ote that the s ame track /title/ chapter may play more than onc e.) You can set the random play option when a disc is playing or sto pped. Important ⢠Random play remains in effect until you select Random Off from the r andom play menu opti ons. ⢠You canâÂÂt use random play with VR format DVD-R/-RW discs, Video CDs playing in PBC mode, MP3/WMA / MPEG-4 AAC discs, DivX video/W MV discs, or while a DVD disc menu is being displayed. ⢠You canâÂÂt use random play to gether with program or repeat p lay. 1 Press PLAY MODE and select âÂÂRandomâ from the list of functions on the left. 2 Select a ra ndom play op tion. The random p lay options a vailable de pend on the kind of disc loaded. For example, for DVD- Video discs, you can select Random Title or Random Chapter (or Random Off ). ⢠For DVD-Audio discs, select Random Group or Ra ndom Track , (or Random Off ). ⢠For CDs, SACDs and Vid eo CDs, select On or Off to switch random play on or off. Tip ⢠Use the following controls during rando m play: Random Title Random Chapter Random Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Button What it does ï° Selects a new track/title/chapter at random. ï¯ Returns to the beginning of the current track/title/chapter; further presses select another random track/title/chapter. Random Title Random Chapter Random Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode DV48AV_EN.bo ok 31 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 32 En Creating a program list This feature lets you prog ram the play order of titles/ch apters/groups /tracks on a d isc. Important ⢠Yo u canâÂÂt use Program p lay with VR format DVD-R/-RW discs, Video CDs playing in PBC mode, MP3/WMA / MPEG-4 AAC discs, DivX video/W MV discs, or while a DVD disc menu is being displayed. 1 Press PLAY MODE and sel ect âÂÂProgramâ from the list of functions on the left. 2 Select âÂÂCreate /Editâ from the list of program optio ns. 3 Use the cursor buttons and ENTER to select a title, chap ter or track for the current step in the program list. For a DVD-Video disc, you can add a title or a chapter to the program list. ⢠For a DVD-Audio disc, you can add a whole group, or a track within a group to the program list. ⢠For a CD, SACD or V ideo CD, select a tra ck to add to the program list. After pressing ENTER to selec t the title/ chapter/group/track, the step number automatically moves down o ne. 4 Rep eat step 3 to bu ild up a program list. A program list can c ontain up to 24 titles/ chapters/tracks. ⢠You can insert steps into the middle of a program list by just highlig hting the position where you wa nt the new step to appear and enter ing a title/ch apter/group / track number. ⢠To delete a step , highlight it and pres s CLEAR . 5 To play the program list, pres s ï¤ (play). Program play remains ac tive until you turn off program play (see below), erase th e program list (see below), eject the disc or switch off the player. Tip ⢠Use the follow ing controls d uring progr am play: Other functions available from the program menu There are a number of other options in the program menu in addi tion to Create/Edit. ⢠Playbac k Start â Starts playback of a saved program list ⢠Playbac k Stop â Turns of f program play, but does not era se the program list ⢠Program Delete â Erase s the program list and turns off pro gram play Create/Edit Playback Start Playback Stop Program Delete A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Program Step 01. 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. Title 1~38 Title 01 Title 02 Title 03 Title 04 Title 05 Title 06 Title 07 Title 08 Chapter 1~004 Chapter 001 Chapter 002 Chapter 003 Chapter 004 Program Button What it does PLAY MODE Save the program list and exit the program edit screen without starting playback ( HOME MENU does the same). ï° Skip to the next step in the program list. DV48AV_EN.bo ok 32 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 33 En Searching a disc You can sear ch DVD-Vide o di scs by title or chapter number, or by time; DVD-Audio discs can be searched by group or track number; SACDs by track number, CDs and Video CDs by track number or time; DivX video /WMV discs by time, and some DivX media files by chapter numb er. Important ⢠Search functions are not a vailable with Video CDs in P BC mode, or with M P3/ WMA/MPEG-4 AAC discs. 1 Press PLAY MODE and select âÂÂSearch Modeâ fro m the list of functions on the left. 2 Select a search mode . The search options ava ilable depend on the kind of disc loaded. ⢠The disc must be playing in order to use time search. 3 Use the num ber buttons to enter a title, chapter or track nu mber, or a time. ⢠For a time search, enter the numbe r of minutes and seconds into the currently playing title (DVD/ DivX video/WM V) or track (CD/Video CD) you wa nt playback to resume from. For example, press 4 , 5 , 0 , 0 to have playback start from 45 minutes into the disc. For 1 hour, 20 min utes and 30 seconds, press 8 , 0 , 3 , 0 . ⢠Some DVD-Audio discs feature pages of browsable pictures. Enter the page number you want. 4 Press ENTER to start playback. Switching subtitles Some DVD-Video and DivX video discs have subtitle s in one o r more languag es; the dis c box will usuall y tell you which subtitle language s are availab le. You can swi tch subtitle language d uring playba ck. 1 Press SUBTITLE repeatedly to sel ect a subtitle op tion. Note ⢠Some discs only allow you to change subtitle language from the disc menu. Press TOP MENU or MENU to access. ⢠To set subtitle preferences, see Subtitle Language on page 41. ⢠See Display ing external subtitle files on page 10 for mor e on DivX subtitles. 0 0 1 Title Search Chapter Search Time Search Input Chapter A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Subtitle English 1/2 Current / T otal DV48AV_EN.bo ok 33 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 34 En Switching audio language/ channels When playing a DVD-Video and DivX video disc recorded with dialog in two or more languages, you can switc h audio language during pla yback. When playing a VR forma t DVD-R/-RW disc recorded with dual-mono audio, you can switch between the main, su b, and mixed channels during pl ayback. When playing a DVD-Audio disc, you may be able to s witch channe lsâÂÂsee the disc bo x for details. (W hen you change the audio channel, playback restarts from the beginning of the current track.) When playing a Video CD, you can switc h between stereo, just the left channel or just the right channel. 1 Press AUD IO repeatedly to select an audio lang uage/channel option. The languag e/channel inform ation is sho wn on-screen. Note ⢠Some DVD discs only all ow you to change audio language from the disc menu. Press TOP MENU or MENU to access. ⢠To set DVD audio language preferences, see Language settings on page 41. Zooming the screen Using the zoom feature yo u can magnify a part of the screen by a fa ctor of 2 or 4, while watching a DVD, Di vX video/WMV title or Vi deo CD or playi ng a JPEG disc. 1 During playback, us e the ZOOM button to select th e zoom factor ( Normal, 2x or 4x). ⢠Since DVD, Video CD, DivX video/W MV title and JPEG pict ures have a fixed resolution, picture quality wil l deteriorate, especially at 4x zoom. This is no t a malfunction. 2 Use the cursor butt ons to change the zoomed area. You can change the zoom f actor and the zoomed area freely during playback. ⢠If the navigation square at the to p of the screen disappears, press ZOOM again to display it. Switching camera angles Some DVD discs feature scenes shot from two or more angles â check the disc box fo r details. When a multi-angle scene is playing, a icon appears on scre en to let you know that other angles ar e available (this can be switched off if you prefer â see Displa y settings on page 41). ⢠During playback, press ANGLE to switch angle. Displaying disc information Various track, chap ter and title inform ation, such as the elapsed and remaining playing time can be disp layed on-screen while a disc is playing. ⢠To show/switch/hide the information displayed, press DISPL AY repeatedly. ⢠When a disc is p laying, the information appears at the top of the screen. Keep pressing DISPLAY to change the displayed information . DV48AV_EN.bo ok 34 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
USB playback 06 35 En Chapter 6 USB playback Using the USB inter face It is possible to listen to two-channel audio and watch JPEG files using the USB interface on the front of th is unit. Connect a US B mass storage device as shown below. Note ⢠This includes playback of MP3/WMA/ MPEG-4 AAC/JPEG files (except files wi th copy-protection or restricted playback). ⢠Compatible USB devices include portable flash memory (particularly keydrives) a nd digital audio players ( MP3 players) of format FAT16/32. It is not possible to connect th is unit to a personal compu ter for USB playback. ⢠Pioneer c annot guarantee compatib ility (operation and/or bus power) with all USB mass storage devices and assumes no responsibility for any l oss of data that may occur when co nnected to this unit. ⢠With large amo unts of data , it may take longer for the system to read the contents of a USB device. ⢠The Home Menu cannot be displayed while using the USB mode. 1 With the p layer switched on , press DVD/USB. Ma ke s ur e y ou r TV i s o n an d s e t t o t h e c or r ec t video input, and that USB MODE is showing on the fro nt panel di splay. 2 Connect you r USB device. The USB terminal i s located on the fron t panel. ⢠Disc Navigator is automatically displayed. 3 Press ENTER to start playback. ⢠T h e m e t h o d o f p l a y b a c k f o r f i l e s s a v e d o n a USB device is the same a s for other discs. For more information, see Basic playback cont rols on page 23 and Playing discs on page 27. 4 Turn off this player and re move the USB device. ⢠The next time you turn this player on it will start up in USB mode. To return to DVD mode, either press DVD/USB or press ï¨ OPEN/CLOSE to open the disc tra y. Important If a USB ERR message lights in the display, it may mean that the power requirem ents of the USB device are too high fo r this player, or that the device is incompat ible. Try the following: ⢠Switch the player off, then on again. ⢠Rec onnecting the USB device with the player switched off. ⢠Change the player back to DVD mode ( LOADING will appear in the front p anel display whether a disc is inserted or not) by pressing DVD/USB , th en once again select USB mode ( USB MODE will appear in the fro nt panel di splay). ⢠Using a dedica ted AC adapter (supplied with the device) for USB power. If this doesnâÂÂt remedy the problem, it is l ikely your USB devic e is incompat ible. ïµï STANDBY/ON USB DVD/USB HDMI ï¯ï° USB mass sto rage device USB (Type A) DV48AV_EN.bo ok 35 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Audio Settings and Video Adjust menus 07 36 En Chapter 7 Audio Settings and Video Adjust menus Audio Settings menu The Audio Settings menu o ffers features for adjusting the way discs sound. 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂAudio Settingsâ from the on-scre en display. 2 Select and change settin gs using the ï©/ ïª/ï«/ï¬ (cursor) buttons, and E NTER. Audio DRC â¢S e t t i n g s : High , Medium , Lo w , Off (default) When watching Dolby Digital DVDs at low volume, itâÂÂs easy to lose the quiet er sounds complete ly â includ ing some of th e dialog. Switching Audio DRC (Dynamic Range Control) to on can help by bringing up the quieter sounds, while control ling loud peaks. How much of a differen ce you hear depends on the material youâÂÂre listening to. If the material doesnâÂÂt have wide va riations in volume, you may not notice much change. Note ⢠Audio DRC is only effective with Dolby Digital audio sources. ⢠Audio DRC is only effective through the digital output when Dig ital Ou t is set to On , and Dolby Digital Out is set to Dolby Digital > PCM (see Digital Au dio Out settings on page 39). ⢠The effect of Audio DRC also depends on your speakers and A V receiver settings. Virtual Surround ⢠Settings: On , Off (default) Switch on Virtual Surro und to enjoy real istic surround soun d effects from just t wo speakers. Tip ⢠You can also use the SURROUND bu tton on the remote control to switch Virtual Surround on. Note ⢠96 kHz linear PCM audio is automati cally downsample d to 48 kHz if Virtual Surround is switched on. â¢T h e Audi o Output M ode (see page 4 5) must be set to 2 Chann el in order to be able to use Virtual Surr ound. ⢠If the player is outp utti ng Dolby Digital, DTS or MPEG bitstream audio (in other words, no conversion to PCM), Virtua l Surround has n o effect on the audio from the digital output. See Digital Audio Out settings on page 39 for how to set up the digital output formats. Audio Settings Audio Settings Virtual Surround Audio DRC Dialog On Off DV48AV_EN.bo ok 36 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Audio Settings and Video Adjust menus 07 37 En ⢠How good the surround effect is varies with the disc. Note ⢠96 kHz linear PCM audio is automatically downsampled to 48 kHz if the Equalizer is switched on. Dialog â¢S e t t i n g s : High , Medium , Lo w , Off (default) The Dialog feature is designed to make the dialog stand out f rom other background sounds in the soundtracks. Video Adjust menu From the Video Adjust scre en you can adjust various settings that affect how the picture is presented. 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂVideo Adjustâ from the on -screen display. 2 Make settings using the ï©/ïª/ï«/ï¬ (cursor) button s, and EN TER. You can ad just the f ollowing pi cture quality settings: ⢠Sharpness â Adjusts the sharpness of edges in the picture ( Fine , Standa rd (default) , Soft ). ⢠Brightness â Adjusts the ove rall brightness ( âÂÂ20 to 20 ). ⢠Contrast â Adjusts t he contrast between light and dark ( âÂÂ16 to 16 ). ⢠Gamma â Adjusts the âÂÂwarmthâ of th e picture ( High , Me dium , Low , Off (default) ). ⢠Hue â Ad justs the red/green balance ( green 9 to red 9 ). ⢠Chroma L evel â Adjusts how saturated colors appear ( âÂÂ9 to 9 ). ⢠BNR â Switche s on/off block nois e reduction ( On , Off (default) ). Adjust t he Brightness , Contra st, Hue and Chroma Level s ettings using the ï«/ï¬ (cursor left/right) buttons. 3 Press ENTER to return to the Video Adjust screen, or HOME MENU to exit. Video Adjust Sharpness Brightness Contrast Gamma Hue Chroma Level BNR Standard 0 0 Off 0 0 Off ï¤ ï¤ ï¤ ï¤ ï¤ ï¤ ï¤ Video Adjust Brightne ss min max 0 DV48AV_EN.bo ok 37 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 08 38 En Chapter 8 Initial Settings menu Using the Initial Settings menu The Initial Settings menu p rovides audio and video output settings, parental lock settings, and display settings, among others. If an option is gray ed out it means that it cannot be changed at the current time. This is usually bec ause a disc is playing. S top the disc, then change the setting. 1P r e s s HOME MEN U and select âÂÂInit ial SettingsâÂÂ. 2 Use the cursor buttons and ENTER to select the setting and option you wan t to set. All the settings and options are explained on the following pages. Note ⢠In the table bel ow, the default setting is shown in bold : other se ttings are shown in italic s . â¢T h e Digital Audio Out settings only need to be set if you have connected the digital output of th is player to an AV receiver, or other equipment. ⢠Check the op erating ins tructions su pplied with your other equipme nt to see which digital aud io formats itâÂÂs comp atible with. ⢠Some setti ngs, such as TV Screen , Audio Language and Subtitle Language may be overridden by the DVD disc. Often th ese settings can also be made from the DVD disc menu. â¢T h e HDMI Out , HDMI Resolution and HDMI Color settings only need to be set if you connected this player to an HDM I- compatible co mponent using the HDMI connector. â¢T h e Digital Audio Out , Compon ent Out , SACD Playback an d Speakers settings cannot be set if the player is con nected to an HDMI-compa tible component usin g the HDMI connector. Additionally, certa in settings such as HDMI Out , HDMI Resolution , and HDMI Color may be changed automatically. Initial Settings DV48AV_EN.bo ok 38 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 08 39 En Digital Audio Out settings Setting Option What it means Digital Out On Digital audio is output from the digital outputs. Note that there is no digital output when pl aying SACDs and some DVD-Audio discs rega rdless of this setting. Off No digital audio output. Dolby Digital Out Dolb y Digital Dolby Digital encoded digital au dio is output when playing a Dolby Digital DVD disc. Dolby Digital > PCM Dolby Digital audio is converte d to PCM a udio before being output. DTS Out DTS DTS encoded digital audio is ou tput when playing a DTS disc. (Noise will be output if your amplifier/receiver is not compatible with DTS audio.) DTS > PC M No digital audio is output when playing a DTS disc.DTS audio is converte d to PCM au dio befor e being out put. Linear PCM Out Down Sample On 96 kHz digital audio is converted to 48 kHz for digital output. Note that High sampling rate DVD-Audio discs (192 kHz or 176.4 kHz) a utomatically output down- sampled audio th rough the digital output s. Down Sample Off 96 kHz digital audio is output as is at 96 kHz. MPEG Out MPEG > PCM MPEG encoded digital audio is converted to PCM audio for digital output. MPEG MPEG encoded digital audio is output as is. HDMI Out LPCM (2CH) Set if your monitor or device on ly accepts st ereo input. On this setting multichannel audio is downmixed to 2 channels for stereo linear PCM output. LPCM (5.1CH) Set if the monitor or devi ce you have connected using H DMI is compatible with Liner PCM multi-channel formats. A ll audio signals are output as linear PC M 5.1 format. (Use this setting if you want to deco de all streams by a player) Auto Dolby Digital, DTS and MP EG sources are processed according to how they were encoded, and linear PCM sources are heard as is. SACD sources are output as linear PCM. Auto (DSD) Set if you want to output DSD audio from an SACD source. Off No digital audio output. Choose this option when you want to change the Digital A udio Out , SACD Playback and Speakers settings. DV48AV_EN.bo ok 39 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 08 40 En Video Output settings Setting Option What it means TV Screen (This setting effective for analog and HDMI video output. See also Sc reen sizes and disc formats on page 52.) 4:3 (Letter Box) Set if you have a conventional 4:3 TV. Widesc reen movies are shown with black bars top and bottom. 4:3 (Pan & Scan) Set if you have a conventional 4:3 TV. Widesc reen movies are shown with the sides cropped so that the image fills the screen. 16:9 (Wide) Set if you have a widescreen TV. 16:9 (Compresse d) Can be selected when you are connected via HDMI, and have the HDMI Resolution set to 1920 x 1080p , 1920 x ã 1080i or 1280 x 720p . Video in 4:3 can be properly displayed on a 16:9 high definiti on television (wit h black bars shown on either side of the screen). Component Out Progr essive Set if your TV is comp atible with progressive scan video (see your TVâÂÂs instruction ma nual for details). Th e PRGSVE indicator lights in the front panel display. See also Switching the video o utput to interlace usi ng the front panel controls on page 13. Note that progre ssive scan video is only outp ut from the compone nt vide o jacks. Interlace Set if your TV is not compatib le with progressive scan video. HDMI Resolution 1920x1080p Set if your TV supports 1 920 x 1080 pixel progressive- scan video. 24 Hz frame rate is not supported. 1920x1080i Set if your TV supports 1920 x 1080 pi xel interlace video. 1280x720p Set if your TV supports 1280 x 720 pixel progressive-scan video. 720x480p Set if your TV supports 7 20 x 480 pixel progr essive-scan video. 720x480i Set if your TV supports 720 x 480 pixel interlace video. HDMI Color Full r ange RGB If colors are weak, this give s brighter colors and deeper black. RGB Use this setting if colors appe ar overly rich on the Full Range RGB setting. Component Outputs component video format (default setting for HDMI- compatible devices). DV48AV_EN.bo ok 40 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 08 41 En Language settings Display settings Setting Option What it means Audio L anguage English If there is an English soundtrack on the disc then it will be played. Languages as displayed If there is the language selected on the disc, then it will be played. Other Language Select to choose a language other than the ones displayed (see page 53). Subtitle Language (See also Displaying externa l subtit le files on page 10 .) English If there are English subtitles on the disc then they will be displayed. Languages as displayed If there is the subtitle language selected on the disc, then it will be displayed. Other Language Select to choose a language other than the ones displayed (see page 53). DVD Menu Lang. w/Subtitle Lang. DVD disc menus will be displayed in the same language as your selected subtitle language, if possible. Languages as displayed DVD disc menus will be displayed in the selected language, if possible. Other Language Select to choose a language other than the ones displayed (see page 53). Subtitle Display On Subtitles are displayed according to your selected subtitle language (see above). Off Subtitles are always off by defa ult when you play a DVD disc (note that some discs override this setting). Setting Option What it means OSD Languag e English On-screen displays of th e pla yer are in English. Languages as displayed On-screen displays are shown in the language selected. Angle Indicato r On A camera icon is displaye d on-screen during multi-angle scenes on a DVD di sc. Off No multi-angle indication is shown. DV48AV_EN.bo ok 41 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 08 42 En Options settings Parental Lock ⢠Default level: Off ; Default password: none ; Default Country/Area code: us (2119) To give you some co ntrol over what your children watch on your DVD player, some DVD-Video discs feature a Parental Lock level. If your player is set to a lowe r level than the disc, the disc wonâÂÂt play. Some discs also support the Countr y/Area Code feature. The player does not play certa in scenes on these discs, depending on the Country/Area Code you set. Note ⢠Not all discs use Parental Lock, and will play without requiring the password first. ⢠If you forget your password, youâÂÂll need to reset the player to register a new password (see Resetting the player on page 53). Registering a new password You must register a pa ssword before you can change the Parenta l Lock level or enter a Country code. 1 Select âÂÂOption sâÂÂ, then âÂÂPasswordâ . 2 Use the nu mber bu ttons to enter a 4-digit passwo rd. The numbers you enter show up as asterisks (*) on-screen. 3 Press ENTER to register the password. You will return to the Options menu screen. Setting Option What it means Parental Lock â See Parent al Lock below. DVD Playback Mode DVD-Audio All material on a DVD-Audio disc is playable. DVD-Video Only the DVD-Video part of a DVD-Audio disc is playable. SACD Playback 2ch Area Select s the 2 cha nnel (strer eo) SACD a udio area of the dis c for playback. Multi-ch Area Selects the multi-channel SACD audio area of the disc for playback. CD Area Selects the standard CD audio area of an SACD/CD hybrid disc for playback. DTS Downmix STEREO Downmixes DTS for 2 cha nnel output to regular stereo. (See also DTS Downmix on page 43.) Lt/Rt Downmixes DTS for 2 channel output to be compatible with Dolby Surround matrix decoders. (See also DTS Downmix on page 43.) DivX VOD Displ ay See About DivXî VOD content on page 44. Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers Parental Loc k DVD Pla yback Mode SACD Pla yback DTS Downmix DivX V OD Passwo rd Level Change Country Code Initial Settings DV48AV_EN.bo ok 42 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 08 43 En Changing your password To change your password, confirm your existing password then enter a new one. 1 Select â Password Changeâ . 2 Use the number butto ns to enter your existing passwo rd, then press ENTER . 3 Enter a new password and pr ess ENTER . This registers the new password and you will return to the Options me nu screen. Setting/changing the Parental Lock 1 Select â Level Changeâ . 2 Use number buttons to enter your password, then press ENTER . 3 Select a ne w level and press ENTER . ⢠Press ï« (cursor left) repeatedly to lock more levels (more discs will requir e the password); press ï¬ (cursor right) to unlock levels. You canâÂÂt lo ck level 1. This sets the new level and you will return to the Options menu screen. Setting/changing the Country/Area code You can f ind the Country/Area code li st on page 61. 1 Select â Country CodeâÂÂ. 2 Use number buttons to enter your password, then press ENTER . 3 Select a Co untry/Area code and press ENTER . There are two ways yo u can do this: ⢠Sel ect by code letter: Use ï©/ïª (cursor up/ down) to change the Country/Area code. ⢠Select by code number: Press ï¬ (cursor right) then use the number butto ns to enter the 4-digit Country/Area code. The new Country/Area code is set and you wil l return to th e Options menu s creen. Note that the new Country/Area code doesnâÂÂt take effect until the next disc is lo aded (or the current disc is reloaded). DTS Downmix ⢠Default setting: STEREO If youâÂÂve selected DTS > PCM in DTS Out on page 39 or 2 Channel in Audio Output Mode on page 45, you can cho ose the way the signal is downmixed to PCM audio. STEREO will downmix the DTS signal to 2-channel stereo, whereas Lt/Rt will downmix to a 2-channel signal compatibl e with Dolby surroun d matrix decoders. (This allows you to hear surround sound if your AV receiver o r amplifier has Dolby Pro Log ic capability.) Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers STEREO Lt/Rt Initial Settings Parental Loc k DVD Pla yback Mode SACD Pla yback DTS Downmix DivX V OD DV48AV_EN.bo ok 43 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 08 44 En About DivX î VOD content In order to play DivX VOD (video on demand) content on this player, you first need to register the player with your DivX VO D content provider. You do this by generating a DivX VOD registration code, which you submit to you r provider. Important ⢠DivX VOD content is protected by a DRM (Digital Right s Management ) system. This restricts playback of content to specific, registered devices. ⢠If you load a di sc that cont ains Div X VOD content not authorized for your play er, the message Authorization Error is displayed and the c ontent wi ll not play. ⢠Resetting the player (as described in Resetting the player on page 53) will not cause you to lose your registration code. Displaying your DivX VOD registration code 1P r e s s HOME MENU and se lect âÂÂInitial SettingsâÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂOption sâÂÂ, then âÂÂD ivX VODâÂÂ. 3 Sele ct âÂÂDispla yâÂÂ. Your 8-digit registrat ion code is displayed. Make a note of the code as you will need it when you register with a DivX VOD provider. Playing DivX î VOD content Some DivX VOD con tent may only be playable a fixed number of times. When you load a disc containing this type of DivX VOD content, the remaining num ber of plays is shown o n- screen and you then have the option of pla ying the disc (thereby using up one of the remaining plays), or stopping. If you load a disc that contains expired DivX VOD content (for example, content that has zero re maining plays), the message Rental Expired is displayed. If your DivX VOD content allo ws an unlimited number of plays, th en you may load the disc into your player and play the content as often as you lik e, and no messag e will be displayed. Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers Parental Loc k DVD Pla yback Mode SACD Pla yback DTS Downmix DivX V OD Display Initial Settings Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers Initial Settings DivX (R) Video On Demand 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Y our registration code is: T o learn more visit www.divx.com/vod Done DV48AV_EN.bo ok 44 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 08 45 En Speakers settings Audio Output Mode ⢠Default s etting: 2 Channel If you connected this player to you r amplifier using the 5.1 chan nel analog outputs (front, surround, center and subwoofer outs), set this to 5.1 Channel ; if yo u connected only the stereo outs, set to 2 Channel . Note ⢠Even if you set Audio Output M ode to 5.1 Channel , youâÂÂll only get sound from all speakers when playing a 5.1 ch annel multi-channel disc. ⢠When set to 5.1 Channe l , only the front left/ right chan nels are outp ut from the AUDIO OUT (2ch) jacks. Chan ge to 2 Channel if you want to listen to downmixed stereo audio (for example, because y ou are listening through the TVâÂÂs built- in speakers). ⢠When set to 5.1 Channel there is no digital output when playing DVD-Audio. â¢I f y o u s e t t o 2 Channel , Dolby Di gital, DTS and MPEG audio is mixed down to two channels s o you still hea r all the audio recorded on the disc. W ith DTS encoded audio, you can choose ho w the signal is downmixed to PCM audio. See DTS Downm ix on page 43 to change the downmix setting. ⢠Some DVD-Audio di scs donâÂÂt allow down- mixing of audio. These discs always output multi-channel audi o regardless of the setting made here. Setting Option What it means Audio Output Mode 2 Channel The player outputs analog audio in stereo only. See also Audio Output Mode below. 5.1 Channel The pl ayer out puts 5.1 c hannel an alog aud io. See al so Audio Output Mode below. Speaker Distance â Specify the distance of your speakers from your listening position. See also Speaker Distance on page 49. Speaker Installation â Specify the number and size of speakers in your system. Se e also Speaker Installation on page 50. Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers Audio Output Mode Speaker Distance Speaker Installation 2 Channel 5.1 Channel Initial Settings DV48AV_EN.bo ok 45 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 08 46 En About the audio output settings The table b elow sho ws how the a udio settin gs you make i n the Initia l Setting s menu (see page 38) affect the output from the 2 channel an d the 5.1 cha nnel analog outputs, an d from the digital outputs with va rious types of disc. * 1 When Aud io Output Mode is set to 2 Channel , the AUDIO OUT (5.1ch) FRONT L / R jacks act as a second pair of stereo audio outputs. * 2 Dolby Digital > PCM , MPEG > PCM or DTS > PCM setting (pa ge 39) * 3 Dolby Digital , MPEG or DTS setting (page 39) * 4 Discs that prohibit down m ixing will be output as 5.1 channel even if 2 Channel is selected as the Audio Output Mode setting (see page 45). * 5 Discs that prohibit downmixing also mute the digital output. * 6 When Audio Output Mode is set to 5.1 Channel , mono sources are heard from the center speaker onl y. Di sc au dio format Player setting Front L / R â â â â â â â â â â â âÂÂâ S urround L/R, Center , SW S urround L/R, Center , SW S urround L/R, Center , SW S urround L/R, Center , SW S urround L/R, Center , SW S urround L/R, Center , SW â Front L / R Front L / R Front L / R Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right * 6 Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right 2 ch downmix 2 ch downmix 2 c h downmix *4 2 ch downmix *5 2 ch downmix *5 2 ch downmix 2 ch downmix Front L / R 2 c h downmix Front L / R 2 c h downmix 2 Ch 5. 1 Ch 2 Ch 5. 1 Ch Front L/R analog output s * 1 S urroun d L/R Center , S W , output s * 1 Digital output s PCM convert *2 Bit s tream *3 Dol by Digital Dol by Digital karaoke 2 Ch / 5. 1 Ch 2 Ch / 5. 1 Ch 2 Ch / 5. 1 Ch 2 Ch / 5. 1 Ch 2 Ch / 5. 1 Ch Linear PCM 2 Ch 5. 1 Ch DT S MPEG 2 Ch 5. 1 Ch DVD-Au dio 2 Ch 5. 1 Ch S uper Aud io CD 2 Ch 5. 1 Ch DT S CD CD Vi d eo CD DVD-RW (VR mo de) DVD Dol b y Digital â 2 c h downmix DT S DT S Dol b y Digital Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right Dol b y Digital MPEG or PCM MPEG DV48AV_EN.bo ok 46 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 08 47 En About the HDMI audio output settings The table below shows how the audio set tings you make in the HDMI Out (see HDMI Out on page 39) and Audio Outp ut Mode screens ( Audio Output Mode on page 45) affect the HDMI output with various types of disc. * 1 These formats include DVD-RW discs. * 2 If the conn ected componen t is not D VD-Audio (C PPM) compat ible, it is n ot possible to output CPPM copy-controlled DVD-Audio sour ces from the HDMI connection (see HDMI output with DVD-Aud io and SACD sources on page 48 for mor e on this). * 3 If the discs prohibit do wnmixi ng, output Front L/R. * 4 If the HDMI d evice you are using is not compat ible with Mu lti-ch formats, th e output signa l is the same as LPCM (2CH) setti ng. * 5 If the HDMI device you are using is not compat ible with these compresse d formats, the signal is output as linear PC M. * 6 If the connected HDMI device is not compa t ible with p rotected au dio contents (s uch as DVD-Audio or SAC D), SACD audio is not ou tput from the HDMI terminal . * 7 Analog SACD audio is not output wh en you have HDMI Out set to Auto (DSD) . CD 5.1 ch * 4 5.1 ch * 4 5.1 ch (DSD) * 4, 7 Disc audio format DVD-Audio (with CPPM) * 2 DVD-Audio (without CPPM) Linear PCM * 1 MPE G * 1 Dolby Digital (Karaoke) Dolby Digital * 1 DTS CD/MP3/WMA/MPE G -4 AAC Video CD DTS CD LPCM (2CH) LPCM (5.1CH) HDMI Out setting Auto Left / Right 5.1 ch * 4 5.1 ch * 4 5.1 ch * 4 5.1 ch * 4 5.1 ch * 4 5.1 ch * 4 Left / Right Left / Right 5.1 ch * 4 Left / Right MPE G * 5 Dolby Digital * 5 Dolby Digital * 5 DTS * 5 5.1 ch * 4 5.1 ch * 4 Left / Right Left / Right Auto (DSD) Left / Right MPE G * 5 Dolby Digital * 5 Dolby Digital * 5 DTS * 5 DTS * 5 DTS * 5 5.1 ch * 4 5.1 ch * 4 Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right 2 ch downmix 2 ch downmix Left / Right or 2 ch downmix * 3 Left / Right or 2 ch downmix * 3 Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right DVD Super Audio CD * 6 Left/Right DV48AV_EN.bo ok 47 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 08 48 En HDMI output with DVD-Audio and SACD sources The way audio sources are output from the HDMI terminal depends on the specification of the connect ed compo nent. * 1 This unit checks the specifi cation of the connected compo nent (suc h sample rate/multi- channel l imitations a nd compat ibility with p rot ected audio contents) and outp uts the signal accordingly. Note that âÂÂDVD-Audio co mpatibleâ indic ates compat ibility with p rotected aud io contents. âÂÂSACD co mpatibleâ indic ates compatib ility with DSD signal s. * 2 If HDMI Out setting (page 39) is set to LPCM (2 CH) , DVD-Audio multichannel sources will be downmixed to stereo. (In cases where the source is d ownmix-prohi bited, only the front left/right channels are output. ) For SACD sources, the 2 ch annel (stereo) SA CD audio area is selected. If the video output resolutio n is 480i or 480p audi o output m ay be limited to 2 channel (depending to the connected co mponent). * 3 In cases w here the sourc e is downmi x-prohibited , only the fro nt left/right c hannels are o utput. * 4 If CPPM shows in the f ront pan el displa y, it means it is not possibl e to outp ut CPPM c opycon- trolled DVD-Audio sources from the HDMI conn ection. Discs with no CPPM protection are limited to 2 channel out put. Component specification Disc Format (DVD-Audio or SACD) 2 ch DVD-Audio and 5.1 channel compatible on HDMI * 1 DVD-Audio and 2 channel compatible on HDMI * 1 Left/Right or 2 ch downmix * 3 Incompatible with DVD-Audio on HDMI * 1 2 ch 2 ch VSX-84TXSI VSX-82TXS PDP-5080HD PDP-4280HD PDP-5050HD PDP-4350HD 5.1 ch No sound * 4 No sound * 4 5.1 ch * 2 Component/output Example Component SACD, DVD-Audio and 5.1 channel compatible on HDMI * 1 2 ch VSX-91TXH 5.1 ch * 2 No sound Auto (DSD) SACD No sound No sound DSD 2ch/5.1 ch DV48AV_EN.bo ok 48 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 08 49 En Speake r Distance ⢠Defau lt settings: all spea kers 10.0ft You only need to make this setting i f you connected this player to yo ur amplifier using the 5.1 channel analog outp uts. These settings do not affect any digital audio output. To get the best surround so und from your system, you should set up the speake r distances from your listeni ng position. 1U s e t h e ï©/ïª (cursor up/down) to select a speaker. â¢T h e L and R speakers are paired; you canâÂÂt set them differently. 2P r e s s ï¬ (cursor right) to change the speaker di stance for the highlighted speaker. 3U s e t h e ï©/ïª (cursor up /down) to change the distance. ⢠When you change the distance settin gs of the front left ( L ) or front right (R ) speakers, all the other speaker distances c hange relative to it. ⢠Front left/right ( L /R ) speaker distances can be set from 1.0 ft to 30.0 ft in 1.0 ft increments. ⢠The center speaker ( C ) can be set from âÂÂ7.0 ft to 0.0 ft relative to th e front left/right speakers. ⢠Surround left/right ( SL / SR ) speakers can be set from âÂÂ20.0 ft to 0.0 ft relative to the front left/rig ht speakers. ⢠You canâÂÂt set the subwoofer ( SW ) distance. 4 Press ï« (cursor left) to go back to the speaker list if you want to modify another speaker, or press ENTER to exit the Sp eaker Distance screen. Note During playback of SACD and MPEG- audio DVD-Video discs, the effective C , SL and SR speaker distance settings are âÂÂ3.0 ft to 0.0 ft relative to the front le ft/right speakers. Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers Audio Output Mode ï¤ 5.1 Channel Speaker Distance Speaker Installation Initial Settings Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers L C R SR SL 10.0ft 10.0ft 10.0ft 10.0ft 10.0ft Initial Settings DV48AV_EN.bo ok 49 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 08 50 En Speaker Inst allation â¢D e f a u l t s e t t i n g s : L/R: Large | C: Large | SL/ SR: Large | SW: On You only need to make this setting i f you connected this player to yo ur amplifier using the 5.1 channel analog outp uts. This setting does not affect digital audio output. Use the Speaker Installation screen to tell the player what kinds of speakers you have connected. 1U s e t h e ï©/ïª (cursor up/down) butto ns to select a speaker. â¢T h e L and R , and SR and SL speakers are paired; you canâÂÂt set them differently. 2P r e s s ï¬ (cursor right) to modify the selected speaker. 3U s e t h e ï©/ïª (cursor up/down) butto ns to change the current setting. ⢠You can see the effect of your changes in the room graphic on the right of the screen. ⢠Except for the subwoofer, you can set speaker size to Large or Small . If the m ain speaker cone in the speaker is 1 2 cm or more, set to Large , otherwise set to Small (or Off if you donâÂÂt have th at speaker). ⢠If you set the front L and R speakers to Small , the cente r and surround speakers are automa tically set to Smal l and the subwoofer to On . ⢠The subwoofer can only be set to On or Off . 4P r e s s ï« (cursor left) to go back to the speaker list if you want to modify another speaker, or press ENTER to exit the Sp eaker Installation screen. Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers Audio Output Mode ï¤ 5.1 Channel Speaker Distance Speaker Installation Initial Settings Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers L C R SR SL SW Large Large Large Large Large On Initial Settings DV48AV_EN.bo ok 50 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additiona l information 09 51 En Chapter 9 Additional information Taking care of your player and discs General Hold discs by the edge or by the center hole and edge. When youâÂÂre not using a disc, return it to its case and store upright. Avoid leaving di scs in excessively cold, humid, or ho t environments (including under direct sunlight). DonâÂÂt glue paper or put stickers on to discs. Do not use a pencil, ball-point pe n or other sharp- tipped writing instrument to write on the disc. DonâÂÂt use self-adhesive disc labels on d iscs as these can cause the disc to wa rp slightly during playback ca using di stortion i n the picture and/or sound. Damaged and shaped discs Do not use cracked, chip ped, warped, or otherwise damaged discs as they may damage the player. This player is designed to be used only with conventional, fully circu lar discs. Do not use shaped discs. Pioneer disclai ms all liabilit y arising in connectio n with the use of shaped discs. Cleaning discs Fingerprints and dust on di scs can affect playback performance. Clean using a soft, dry cloth, wiping the disc li ghtly from the center to the outside edge as shown below. If necessar y, use a cloth so aked in alco hol, or a commerci ally available CD/D VD cleaning kit to clean a disc more thorough ly. Never use benzine, thinn er or other cleaning agents, including products designed fo r cleaning vinyl record s. Cleaning the unitâÂÂs exterior Unplug the unit be fore cleaning. Use a dry cloth to wipe off dust and dirt. If the surfaces are very dirty, wipe with a soft cloth dipped in some neutral cleanser diluted five or six times with water and wrung out well, then wipe again with a dry cloth. Do not use furnitu re wax or cleaners. Never use thin ners, benzine or in secticide s prays or other chemica ls on or near this unit. If you use a ch emical-i mpregnated cleaning cloth, r ead the instru ctions caref ully before use. These cloths may leave smea r marks on half-mirror finish surfaces; if this happens, finish with a dry clot h. Cleaning the pickup lens The DVD playerâÂÂs lens should not become dirty in normal use, but if for some reason it should malfunction due to dust or dirt, consult your nearest Pioneer-authorize d service center. We do not recommend using commercially available lens cleaners for CD players. DV48AV_EN.bo ok 51 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additiona l information 09 52 En Condensation Condensation may form inside the player if it is brought into a wa rm room from outside, o r if the temperature of the room rises quickly. Although the condensatio n wonâÂÂt damage the player, it may temporarily impair its performance. Leave it to adjust to the warmer temperature fo r about an hour be fore switching on. Moving the play er If you need to move the player, first press ïµ STANDBY/ON on the front panel to turn the player off. Wai t for -OFF- to disappear from the display, then unplug the power cable. Never lift or move the unit during playback â discs rotate at a high speed and may be damaged. Screen sizes and disc f ormats DVD-Video discs come in several different screen aspect ratios, ranging f rom TV programs, which are genera lly 4:3, to CinemaScope widescreen movies, with an aspect ratio of up to about 7:3 . Televisions, too, come in different aspect ratios; âÂÂstandardâ 4:3 and widescreen 16:9. Widescreen TV u sers If you have a widescre en TV, the TV Screen setting (page 40) of this player should be set to 16:9 (Wid e) or 16:9 (C ompressed) . When you watch discs recorded in 4:3 format with the 16:9 (Wide) setting, you can use the TV controls to select ho w the picture is presented. Your TV may offer various zoom and stretch options; see the instructions that came with your TV for details. Please note tha t some movie aspect ratios are wider than 16:9, so even th ough you have a widescreen TV, these discs will stil l play in a âÂÂletter boxâ style with bl ac k bars at the top an d bottom of the screen. Standard TV users If you have a stan dard TV, the TV Screen setting (page 40) of this player should be set to 4:3 (Let ter Box) or 4:3 (Pan&S can) , depending on which you prefer. Set to 4:3 (Letter Box) , widescreen discs are shown with black bars top and bottom. Set to 4:3 (Pan&Scan) , widescreen discs are shown with the left and right sides cropped. Although the pictur e looks larger, you don âÂÂt actually see th e whole picture. Please note that many widescreen discs override the playerâÂÂs setti ngs so that the disc is shown in letter box format rega rdless of the setting. Note â¢U s i n g t h e 16:9 (Wide) or 16: 9 (Compresse d) setting with a standard 4:3 TV, or either of the 4:3 settings with a widescreen TV, will result in a distorted picture. DV48AV_EN.bo ok 52 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additiona l information 09 53 En Resetting the player Use this proce dure to reset all the playerâÂÂs settings to the fac tory defaul t. 1 Switch the player into stand by. 2 Using the front panel buttons, hold down the ï§ (sto p) button and press ïµ STANDBY/ON to switch the player back on. All the playerâÂÂs settings a re now reset. DVD-Video regions All DVD-Video discs car ry a region mark on the case somewhere that indicates which region(s) of the world the di sc is compatible with. Your DVD player also has a region mark, which you can find on the rear pan el. Discs from inco mpatible reg ions will n ot play in this player. In this case the attention sen tence Incompati ble disc region number C anâÂÂt play disc is displayed on screen. Discs marked ALL will play in any playe r. The diagram below shows the various DVD regions of the world. Selecting languages using the language code list Some of th e language options (such as âÂÂD VD Menu Lang.â in the Initial S ettings) allow you to set your preferred language from any o f the 136 languages listed in the language code list on page 61. 1 Select âÂÂOth er LanguageâÂÂ. 2U s e t h e ï«/ï¬ (cursor left/right) buttons to select either a code letter or a code numbe r. 3U s e t h e ï©/ïª (cursor up/down) buttons to select a code letter or a code number. See Language code list on page 61 for a complete list of languages and cod es. 1 2 2 5 5 6 3 2 1 4 4 DV48AV_EN.bo ok 53 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additiona l information 09 54 En Troubleshooting Incorrect operatio n is often mistaken for tro ubl e or malfunction. If you think that there is something wrong with this comp onent, check the points below. Sometimes the trou ble may lie in another co mponent. Inspect th e other componen ts and electrica l appl iances being used. If the trouble cannot be recti fied after checking the items below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or yo ur dealer to carry out repair work. Problem Remedy The disc wonâÂÂt play or is automatically ejected after loading. ⢠Make sure the disc is free from dirt and dust and is not damaged (page 51). ⢠Make sure the disc is loaded with the label side face-up and aligned properly in the disc tray guide. ⢠Incompatible region number: If the region number on a DVD-Video disc does not match the number on th e player, the disc cannot be used (page 53). In this case the attention sentence âÂÂIncompatible disc region number CanâÂÂt play di scâ is displayed on screen. ⢠Condensation inside the player: Allow time for condensation to evaporate. Avoid using the player near an air-conditioning unit. ⢠Disc is loaded upside down: Reload the disc with the label side face up. DVD-Audio playba ck stops. ⢠The disc may h ave been illegally copied. Picture playback stops and the operation buttons cannot be used. ⢠Press ï§ , then start playback again ( ï¤ ). ⢠Press and hold the front panel ïµ STANDBY/ON button for about 10 seconds to switch the unit off, th en press again to switch back on. ⢠Switch the power off once, unplug from the wall socket, then plug back in and s witch on ag ain using the front panel ïµ STANDBY/ON button. New settings made in the Setup screen menu s while a disc is playing are ineffective. ⢠Some settings can be changed whil e a disc is playing, but are not effective until the disc is stopped then restarted: Press ï§ , then start playback again ( ï¤ ). Settings are canceled. ⢠When the power is cut due to po wer failure or by unplugging the power cord, settings will be canceled: Press ïµ STANDBY/ON on the front panel to turn the player off. Wait for -OFF- to disappear from the display, then unplug the power cord. The remote control doesnâÂÂt seem to wo rk. ⢠The remote control is too far from the player, or the angle with the remote sensor is too wide: Use the remote within its operating range (page 19). ⢠The b atter ies are e xhaust ed: Put in new ones (page 7). DV48AV_EN.bo ok 54 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additiona l information 09 55 En No picture/No color. ⢠Incorrect video connections: Check that connection s are correct and that plugs are inserted fully. Also check the video ca ble for damage. ⢠TV/monit or or AV amplifier settin gs are incorrect: Check the instruction manual of the connected equipment. ⢠The video output is set to progre ssive but you r TV/monitor is not compatible with progressive scan: See page 13 for how to set to Interlace . Screen is stretched or aspect does not chan ge. ⢠The TV Screen setting in the Initial Settings menu is incorrect. See page 52 for how to set it correctly for you r TV/monitor. Pict ure dis turbanc e during playback or the picture is dark. ⢠This player is compatible with Macro-Vision Syst em copy guard. Some discs include a copy prevention signal, and when this type of disc is played back, stripes etc., may appear on some sections of the picture depending on the TV. Thi s is not a malfunction. ⢠Due to the playerâÂÂs copy protection circuits, connection of this device through a VCR or an AV selector may prevent recording or cause picture problems. This is not a malfunction. No audio , or audio i s distorted. ⢠No audio is output during slow motion playback or when scanning discs other than audio CDs and SACDs. ⢠Some DVD discs do not output digital audio: Switch your amplifier to the playerâÂÂs analog outputs. ⢠Check that the disc is free from dust and dirt, and that it is not damaged (page 51). ⢠Check that all interconnects are firmly inserted. ⢠Check that the plugs and terminals are free of dirt, oxide, etc. and clean if necessary. Also check the cable for damage. ⢠Make sure the playerâÂÂs output is not connected to the amplifierâÂÂs phono (turntable) inputs. ⢠Check your amplifier/rec eiverâÂÂs settings (volume, input function, speaker settings, etc.). The analog audio is OK, but there appears to be no digital audio s ignal. ⢠Make sure that the Digital Out setting is set to On (page 39). ⢠Check that the Dolby Digital, DTS and MPEG out settings (page 39) are suitable for your amplifier/rece iver â check the instruction manual that came with your amplif ier/receiver . ⢠SACDs and some DVD-Audio discs do not output digital audio. Listen through the player âÂÂs analog audio outputs. Noticeable difference in DVD and CD volum e. ⢠This is due to differences in the audio format and is not a malfunct ion. Problem Remedy DV48AV_EN.bo ok 55 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additiona l information 09 56 En Cannot play multi- channel audio. ⢠Make sure that Audio Output Mode is set to 5.1 Channel (page 45). ⢠Check that the Dolby Digital, DTS and MPEG Out settings (page 39) are suitable for your amplifier/rece iver â check the instruction manual that came with your amplif ier/receiver . ⢠DVD-Audio and SACDs do not outp ut multich annel digital audio. Listen through the play erâÂÂs analog outputs. ⢠Check that the settings in the Speaker Installation screen are correct (page 50). ⢠Check the audio options avai lable from the disc menu. Cannot listen to hig h- sampling rate audio through the digital output. ⢠Make sure that Linear PCM Out is set to Down Sample Off (page 39). ⢠As a copy-protection measure, some DVDs do not output 96kHz audio. In this case, even if set to Down Sample Off , the player automatically outputs the audio at 48 kHz. This is not a malfunction. Cannot outp ut 192 kHz or 176.4 kHz digital audio. ⢠The player does not output digita l audio at these sampling rates. The digital output is automatically downsampled. Cannot outp ut 96 kHz or 88.2 kHz digital audio . ⢠Check that Linear PCM Out is set to Down Sample Off (page 39). ⢠Some discs are digital copy pr otected and do not output high sampling rate digital audio. In this case the output is automatically downsampled. No DTS audio ou tput. ⢠If this unit is connected to a non-D TS compatible amplifier or decoder using a digital audio cable, set DTS Out to DTS > PCM (page 39). If you do no t do this, noise will be output when you play a DTS disc. ⢠If this unit is connected to a DTS-compatible ampli fier or decoder using a digital audio cable, check th e amplifier settings, and that the cable is properly connected. Audio mi x does not sound right or sou nds incomplete (for example, inaudible dialog ). ⢠Make sure that Audio Output Mode is set to 2 C hannel if youâÂÂve connected to the stereo inputs on your amplif ier or TV (page 4 5). CanâÂÂt hear effect of Virtual Surround. ⢠Virtual Surr ound does not work with SACD or DVD-Audio. ⢠The Virtual S urround effect is only output through the AUDIO OUT (2ch) analog audio outputs. ⢠Make sure that Audio Output Mode is set to 2 C hannel (page 45). ⢠The effectiveness of Virtual Surround varies with the disc. Problem Remedy DV48AV_EN.bo ok 56 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additiona l information 09 57 En HDMI troubleshooting Problem Remedy No HDMI audio outp ut. ⢠Check whether or not HDMI Out is set to Off . (See HDMI O ut on page 39.) ⢠This unit has been designed to be compliant with HDMI (High - Definition Mu ltimedia Interf ace). Depend ing on the componen t you have connected, unreliable si gnal transfers may result. ⢠If the front panel HDMI indicator is lit: â Y ou wonâÂÂt hear any sound from the HDMI output if the so urce component is only DVI/HDCP -compatible. ⢠If the front panel HDMI indicator is unlit then: â Make sure that youâÂÂve selected th is player as the HDMI input in the settings for the component youâÂÂre using. Y ou may need to refer to the instruction manual of the component to do this. â Check that the HDMI cable is conn ected properly and that the cable isnâÂÂt damaged. â Check that components connecte d using the HDMI interface are switched on and HDMI compatible. No HDMI vi deo output. ⢠Make sure that youâÂÂve sele cted th is player as the HDMI input in the settings for the component youâÂÂre using. Y ou may need to refer to the instruction manual of the component to do this. ⢠Check that the HDMI cable is conn ected properly and that the cable isnâÂÂt damaged. ⢠Check that components connecte d using the HDMI interface are switched on and HDMI compatible. ⢠This unit has been designed to be compliant with HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Inter face) . Depending on the component you have connected, us ing a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal transfers. ⢠Make sure the resolution on this player matches that of the component you have connected using H DMI. See HDMI Resolution on page 40 to change the HDMI resolution. See Resetting the output resolution to the default setting with HDMI connection o n p a g e 1 6 i f y o u want to reset the output resolution . No multichannel HDMI audio. ⢠Make sure the HD MI Out setting is set to Auto , Auto (DSD) or LPCM (5.1CH) (see HDMI Out on page 39 to do this). See also About the HDMI audio output settings on page 47 and HDMI output with DVD-Audio and SACD sources on page 48. No sound is output from the AUDIO OUT (5.1ch) jack when conne cted via HDMI. ⢠Check whether or not HDMI Out is set to Off . (See HDMI O ut on page 39.) Component Out can not be set to Interlace. ⢠You can use the Interlace setting if the HDMI Resolution is set to 720 x 480i . DV48AV_EN.bo ok 57 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additiona l information 09 58 En USB troubleshooting Note ⢠Static electricity or other exte rnal influences may cause ma lfun ctioning of this un it. In this case, unplug the power cord and th en plug back in. Th is will usually reset th e unit for proper operation. If this doe s not co rrect the problem, plea se consult your nearest Pioneer service center. A connected DVI component (w ith HDCP) doesnâÂÂt work with this player. ⢠This unit has been designed to be compliant with HDMI (High- Definition Multimedia Inter face) . Depending on the component you have connected, us ing a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal transfers. Problem Remedy Problem Remedy USB mass storage devic e is not recognized by the system. ⢠Make sure you have co mpletely inserted the USB connector to this unit. ⢠Check that the memory format is FAT16 or FAT32 . ⢠USB devices with an intern al USB hub are not supported. Files donâÂÂt show up in the Navigator/Photo Browser. ⢠The files must have the corre ct file extension: .mp3 for MP3 files; .wma for WMA files; .m4a for MPEG-4 AAC files; . j pg for JPEG files (upper o r lower- case is OK). ⢠Make sure the file perm issi on hasnâÂÂt been restri cted (t hrough a pa ssword, etc.). CanâÂÂt play WMA or MPEG- 4 AAC files. ⢠The files were recorded us ing DRM (dig ital rights mana gement) or FairPlay copy- protectio n. This is not a malfun ction. DV48AV_EN.bo ok 58 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additiona l information 09 59 En Glossary Analog audio Direct representation of sound by an electrical signal. See also Digital audi o . Aspect ratio The width of a TV screen relative to its height. Conventional TVs a re 4:3; widescreen mode ls ar e 16:9. Bonus Group (DVD-Audio only) An âÂÂextraâ group on some DVD-Audio discs that requires a key number to access. Browsable pictures (DVD-Audio only) A feature of some DVD-Audio discs in which the user can browse still pictures recorded on the disc as the audio is played. Digital audio In direct representation of sound using numbers. See also Sampli ng freque ncy and Analog audio . DivX DivX is a media technology create d by DivX, Inc. DivX media files contain not only video but also include advanced media features like menus, subtitles, and alternate audiotracks. Dolby Digital A multi-channel audio encoding system developed by Dolby Laboratories that enables fa r more audio to be stored on a disc than PCM encoding. See als o PCM (Pulse Code Modulation ) . DRM DRM (digital rights management) copy protection is a technology designed to prevent unauthori zed copyin g by restricting playback, e tc. of compressed audio files on devices other than the PC (or ot her recording equipment) used to record it. For detailed information, please see the instruction manuals or help files that came with your PC and/or software. DTS A multi-channel audio encoding system developed by Digital Theater Systems that enables far more audio to be stored on a disc than PCM encoding. See als o PCM (Pulse Code Modulation ) . DSD (Direct Stream Digital) The Digital Audio encoding system found on SACDs, that expr esses the audio signals by the pulse density of one bit data. EXIF (Exchangeable Image File) A file format developed by FUJIFI LM for digital still cameras. Digital cameras from various manufacturers use this compressed file format which car ries date, time and thumbnail informa tion, as well as the picture data. File extension A tag added to the end of a filename to indicate the type of fil e. For example, âÂÂ.mp3â indicates an MP3 file. HDMI HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is a high-speed digital interface which has the capability to support standard, enhanced, or high- definition video plus standard to multi- channel surround-sound aud io on a single d igital co nn ection. HDMI features include uncompressed digital video, a bandwidth of up to 5 gigabytes per second and communication between the AV sourc e and AV devices such as DTVs. ISO 9660 format Intern ational sta ndard fo r the vo lume and file structure of CD-ROM discs. JPEG A standard file format used for still images. JPEG files are identified by the file extension âÂÂ.jpgâ . MP3 M P3 (MPEG1 audio layer 3) is a compressed stereo audio file format. Files are rec ognized by their file extension âÂÂ.mp3âÂÂ. MPEG-4 AAC MPEG-4 AAC is a compr essed ste reo audio file format. Files are recognized by the extention âÂÂ.m4aâÂÂ. Note that some files purchased with copyright protection (such as files from the iTunes store) may not playback. MPEG audio An audio format used on Video CDs and some DVD discs. Packed PCM (DVD-Audio only) A lossless compression system th at enables more PCM audio to be stored on a DVD-Audio disc than would otherwise be possible. PBC (PlayBack Control) A system of navigating a Video CD through on-screen menus recorded onto the disc. PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) Digital audio encoding system found on CDs. Good quality, but requires a lot of data compared to Dolby Digital , DTS and MPEG encoded audio. See also Digital a udio . DV48AV_EN.bo ok 59 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additiona l information 09 60 En Progressive scan video All the lines that make up a vide o picture are updated in one pass (compared to interlace w hich takes two passes to update the whole picture). Regions (DVD-Video only) These associate DVD-Video discs and players with particular areas of the world. See DVD-Vide o regions on page 53 for more information. Sampling frequency The rate at which sound is measured t o be turned into digital audio data. The higher the rate, the better the sound quality. CD is 44.1 kHz; DVD can be up to 96 kHz. See also Digital a udio . Super Audio CD (SACD) Super Audio CD is a high quality audio disc format that can accommodate high sampling rate stereo and multi- channel audio, as well as conventional CD audio all on the same disc. WMA WMA is short for Windows Media Audio and refers to an audio compression technology developed by Microsoft Corporation. Files are recognized by their file extension âÂÂ.wmaâÂÂ. WMV WMV is an acron ym for Windows Media Video and refers to a video compression technology developed by Microsoft Corporation. Files are recognized by the file extension âÂÂ.wmvâÂÂ. DV48AV_EN.bo ok 60 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additiona l information 09 61 En Language code list Language (Language co de letter), Language code Country/Area code list Country/Area, Country/Area co de, Country/Ar ea code letter Japanese (ja), 1001 English (en), 0514 French ( fr), 0618 German (de), 0405 Italian (it), 0920 Spanish (es), 0519 Chinese (zh), 2608 Dutch (nl), 1412 Portuguese (pt), 1620 Swedish (sv), 1922 Russian (ru), 1821 Korean (ko), 1115 Greek (el), 0512 Afar ( aa), 0101 Abkhazian (ab), 0102 Afrikaans (af), 0106 Amharic (am), 0113 Arabic (ar), 0118 Assamese (as), 0119 Aymara (ay), 0125 Azerbaijani (az), 0126 Bashkir (ba), 0201 Byelorussian (be), 0205 Bulgarian (bg), 0207 Bihari (bh), 0208 Bislama (bi), 0209 Bengali (bn), 0214 Tibetan (bo ), 0215 Breton (br), 0218 Catalan (ca), 0301 Corsican (co), 0315 Czech (cs), 0319 Welsh (cy), 0325 Danish (da), 0401 Bhutani (dz), 0426 Esperanto (eo), 05 15 Estonian (et), 0520 Basque (eu), 0521 Persian (fa), 0601 Finnish (fi), 0609 Fiji (fj), 0610 Faroese (fo), 0615 Frisian (fy), 0625 Irish (ga), 0701 Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704 Galician (gl), 0712 Guarani (gn), 0714 Gujarati (gu), 0721 Hausa (ha), 0801 Hindi (hi), 0809 Croat ian (h r), 0818 Hungarian (hu), 0821 Armenian (hy), 0825 Interlingua (ia), 0901 Interlingue (ie), 0905 Inupiak (ik), 0911 Indonesian (in), 0914 Iceland ic (is), 09 19 Hebrew (iw), 0923 Yiddish (ji), 1 009 Javane se (j w), 1023 Georgian (ka), 1101 Kazakh (kk), 1111 Greenlandic (kl), 1112 Cambo dian ( km), 1113 Kannada (kn), 1114 Kashmiri (ks), 1119 Kurdish (ku), 1121 Kirghiz (ky), 1125 Latin (la), 1201 Lingala (ln), 1214 Laothian (lo), 1215 Lithuanian (lt), 1220 Latvian (lv), 1222 Malagasy (mg), 1307 Maori (mi), 1309 Macedonian (mk), 1311 Malayalam (ml), 1312 Mongolian (mn), 1314 Moldavian (mo), 1315 Marathi (mr), 1318 Malay (ms), 1319 Maltese (mt), 1320 Burmes e (my), 1325 Nauru (na), 1401 Nepali (ne), 1405 Norwegian (no), 1415 Occitan (oc), 1503 Oromo (om), 1513 Oriya (or), 1518 Panjabi (pa), 1601 Polish (pl), 1612 Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619 Quechua (qu), 1721 Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 18 13 Kirundi (rn), 1814 Roma nian (ro) , 1815 Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823 Sanskrit (sa), 1901 Sindhi (sd), 1904 Sangho (sg), 1907 Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908 Sinhalese (si), 1909 Slovak (sk), 1911 Slovenian (sl), 1912 Samoan (sm), 1913 Shona (sn), 1914 Somali (so), 1915 Albanian (sq), 19 17 Serbian (sr), 1918 Siswati (ss), 1919 Sesotho (st), 1920 Sundanese (su), 1921 Swahili (sw), 1923 Tamil (ta), 2001 Telugu (te), 2005 Tajik (tg), 2007 Thai (th), 2008 Tigrinya (ti), 2009 Turkmen (tk), 2011 Tagalog (tl), 2012 Setswana (tn), 2014 Tonga (to), 2015 Turkish (tr), 2018 Tsonga (ts ), 2019 Tatar (tt), 2020 Twi (tw), 2023 Ukrainian (uk), 2111 Urdu (ur), 2118 Uzbek (uz), 2126 Vietnamese (vi), 2209 Volapük ( vo), 2215 Wolof (wo), 2315 Xhosa (xh), 2408 Yoruba (yo), 2515 Zulu (zu), 2621 Argentina, 0118 , ar Australia, 0121 , au Austria, 0120 , at Belgium, 0205 , be Brazil, 0218 , br Canada, 0301 , ca Chile, 0312 , cl China, 0314 , cn Denmark, 0411 , dk Finland , 0609 , fi Franc e, 0618 , fr Germany, 0405 , de Hong Kong, 0811 , hk India, 0914 , in Indonesia, 09 04 , id Italy, 0920 , it Japan, 1016 , jp Korea, Republic of, 1118 , kr Malaysia, 1325 , my Mexico, 1324 , mx Netherlands, 1412 , nl New Zealand, 1426 , nz Norway, 1415 , no Pakistan, 1611 , pk Philippines, 1608 , ph Portugal, 1620 , pt Russian Federat ion, 1821 , ru Singapore, 1907 , sg Spain, 0519 , es Sweden, 1905 , se Switzerland, 0308 , ch Taiwan, 2023 , tw Thailand, 2008 , th United Kingdom, 0702 , gb USA, 2119 , us DV48AV_EN.bo ok 61 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additiona l information 09 62 En Specifications General Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC 120 V, 60 Hz Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 W Power consumption (standby) . . . . . . . . . . 0.7 W Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6 kg (5 lb 12 oz) Dimensions 420 mm (W) x 51.5 mm (H) x 215.5 mm (D) (16-9/16 in. (W) x 2-1/16 in. (H) x 8-1/2 in. (D)) Operating temperature . . . . . . . 5 ðC to 35 ðC ( 41 ðF to 95 ðF) Operating humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 % to 85 % (no condensation) Component video output Y (luminance) - Output level . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 é ) P B (color) - Output level . . . . . . . . 0.7 Vp-p (75 é ) P R (color) - Output level . . . . . . . . 0.7 Vp-p (75 é ) Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .RCA S-video output Y (luminance) - Output level . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 é ) C (color) - Output level . . . . . . . 286 mVp-p (75 é ) Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-video Video output Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 é ) Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .RCA Audio output (1 stereo pair) Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . During audio output 200 mVrms (1 kHz, âÂÂ20 dB) Number of channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .RCA HDMI output HDMI output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 pin Audio output (multi-channel / L, R, C, SW, SL, SR) Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . .During audio output 200 mVrms (1 kHz, âÂÂ20 dB) Number of channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA Digital audio characteristics Frequency response . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Hz to 44 kHz S/N ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 dB Dynamic range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 dB Total harmonic distortion . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0023 % Wow and flutter . . . . . . . . Limit of measurement (ñ0.001 % W. PEAK) or lower Digital output Coaxial digital output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA Optical digital output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optical Accessories Remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 AA/R6P dry cell batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Audio/video cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Operating i nstructions The specif ications an d design of this product are sub ject to change without noti ce, due to im provemen t. DV48AV_EN.bo ok 62 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
<VRB1473-A> Printed in Thailand <07F00001> Published b y Pioneer Cor poration. Cop yright é 2007 Pioneer Cor poration. All rights reser ved. PIONEER CORPORA TION 4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, T okyo 153-8654, Japan PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P .O . BO X 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U .S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANAD A, INC. 300 Allstate P ar kwa y , Mar kham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411 PIONEER EUROPE NV Hav en 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele , Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIA CENTRE PTE. L TD . 253 Ale xandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555 PIONEER ELECTRONICS A USTRALIA PTY . L TD . 178-184 Boundar y Road, Braeside , Victor ia 3195, Austr alia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V . Blvd.Manuel A vila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Me xico ,D .F . 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270 Should this product requi r e se r vice in the U.S.A. and you wish to locate the nea rest P ionee r Autho rized Inde pendent Se r vice Com pany , o r if you wish to pu rchase re placement pa r ts, o pe rating inst r uctions, se r vice manuals, o r accesso ries, please call the numbe r shown below . 8 0 0 â 4 2 1 â 1 4 0 4 Please do not shi p you r product to P ionee r without fi rst calling the Custome r Su ppo r t Division at the above listed numbe r fo r assistance. P ionee r Elect r onics (USA) Inc. Custome r Su ppo r t Division P .O . BOX 1760, Long Beach, CA 90801-1760, U.S.A. Fo r warr anty infor mation p lease see the Limited W a rranty sheet included with you r pr oduct. Should this product requi r e se r vice in Canada, please contact a P ionee r Canadian Autho rized Deale r to locate the nea rest P ionee r Autho rized Se r vice Com p any in Canada. Alte rnatively , please contact the Custome r Satisfaction De pa rtment at the following add r ess: P ionee r Elect ronics of Canada, Inc. Custome r Satisfaction De pa r tment 300 Allstate P a rkway , Ma r kham, Onta r io L3R 0P2 1-877-283-5901 905-479-4411 Fo r warr anty infor mation p lease see the Limited W a rranty sheet included with you r pr oduct. Si ce produit doit êt re ré pa ré au Canada, veuillez vous ad resse r àun dist ributeu r auto risé P ionee r du Canada pou r obteni r le nom du Cent r e de Se r vice Auto r isé P ionee r le p lus pr ès de chez-vous. V ous pouvez aussi contacte r le Se r vice àla clientèle de Pionee r : P ionee r ÃÂlect roniques du Canada, Inc. Se r vice Clientèle 300, Allstate P a r kway , Ma rkham, Onta r io L3R 0P2 1-877-283-5901 905-479-4411 Po u r obtenir des r enseignements sur la gar antie, veuillez vous r ep or te r au feuillet sur la ga rantie r est r einte qui accom pagne le pr oduit. S018_B_EF DV48AV_EN.bo ok 64 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
W ARNING â TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. D1-4-2-1_En IMPORT ANT NOTICE â THE SERIAL NUMBER FOR THIS EQUIPMENT IS LOCA TED IN THE REAR. PLEASE WRITE THIS SERIAL NUMBER ON YOUR ENCL OSED W ARRANTY CARD AND KEEP IN A SECURE AREA. THIS IS FOR YOUR SECURITY . D1-4-2-6-1_En CAUTION : USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MA Y RESUL T IN HAZARDOUS RADIA TION EXPOSURE. CAUTION : THE USE OF OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH THIS PRODUCT WILL INCREASE EYE HAZARD. D6-8-2-1_En NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to P art 15 of the FCC R ules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful inter ference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful inter ference to radio communications. However , there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful inter ference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the inter ference by one or more of the following measures: â R eorient or relocate the receiving antenna. â Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver . â Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. â Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. D8-10-1-2_En Information to User Alteration or modifications carried out without appropriate authorization may invalidate the user âÂÂs right to operate the equipment. D8-10-2_En W ARNING: Handling the cord on this product or cords associated with accessories sold with the product will expose you to lead, a chemical known to the State of California and other governmental entities to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. D36-P4_En W ash hands after handling T his product contains mercur y . Disposal of this material may be regulated due to environmental considerations. F or disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or the Electronics Industries Alliance : www .eiae.org. K057_En The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (ser vicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. The lightning flash with arrowhead, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. CAUTION: TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE P ARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN D1-4-2-3_En IMPOR T ANT Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly . After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference. DV48AV_EN.book 2 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ æÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ åÂÂ
READ INSTRUCTIONS â All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the product is operated. RET AIN INSTRUCTIONS â The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference. HEED WARNINGS â All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS â All operating and use instructions should be followed. CLEANING â The product should be cleaned only with a polishing cloth or a soft dr y cloth. Never clean with furniture wax, benzine, insecticides or other volatile liquids since they may corrode the cabinet. A TT ACHMENTS â Do not use attachments not recommended by the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards. WA TER AND MOISTURE â Do not use this product near water â for example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool; and the like. ACCESSORIES â Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer , or sold with the product. Any mounting of the product should follow the manufacturer âÂÂs instructions, and should use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer . CART â A product and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the product and cart combination to overturn. VENTILA TION â Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, and these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer âÂÂs instructions have been adhered to. POWER SOURCES â This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your product dealer or local power company . LOCA TION â The appliance should be installed in a stable location. NONUSE PERIODS â The power cord of the appliance should be unplugged from the outlet when left un-used for a long period of time. GROUNDING OR POLARIZA TION ⢠If this product is equipped with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other), it will fit into the outlet only one way . This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug. ⢠If this product is equipped with a three-wire grounding type plug, a plug having a third (grounding) pin, it will only fit into a grounding type power outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding type plug. POWER-CORD PROTECTION â P ower-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the product. OUTDOOR ANTENNA GROUNDING â If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFP A 70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna-discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. See Figure A. LIGHTNING â For added protection for this product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product due to lightning and power-line surges. POWER LINES â An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal. OVERLOADING â Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock. OBJECT AND LIQUID ENTRY â Never push objects of any kind into this product through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product. SERVICING â Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified ser vice personnel. DAMAGE REQUIRING SERVICE â Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions: ⢠When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged. ⢠If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the product. ⢠If the product has been exposed to rain or water . ⢠If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to its normal operation. ⢠If the product has been dropped or damaged in any way . ⢠When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance â this indicates a need for ser vice. REPLACEMENT P ARTS â When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other hazards. SAFETY CHECK â Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the product is in proper operating condition. WALL OR CEILING MOUNTING â The product should not be mounted to a wall or ceiling. HEA T â The product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products (including amplifiers) that produce heat. GROUND CLAMP ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT (NEC SECTION 810-20) GROUNDING CONDUCTORS (NEC SECTION 810-21) GROUND CLAMPS POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM (NEC ART 250, P ART H) NEC â NA TIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE Fig. A D1-4-2-2_En This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numérique de la Classe B est conforme àla norme NMB-003 du Canada. D8-10-1-3_EF CAUTION: This product satisfies FCC regulations when shielded cables and connectors are used to connect the unit to other equipment. T o prevent electromagnetic interference with electric appliances such as radios and televisions, use shielded cables and connectors for connections. D8-10-3a_En DV48AV_EN.book 3 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ æÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ åÂÂ
C67-7-3_En S001_En Selecting fine audio equipment such as the unit youâÂÂve just purchased is only the start of your musical enjoyment. Now itâÂÂs time to consider how you can maximize the fun and excitement your equipment offers. This manufacturer and the Electronic Industries AssociationâÂÂs Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion-and, most importantly , without affecting your sensitive hearing. Sound can be deceiving. Over time your hearing âÂÂcomfort levelâ adapts to higher volumes of sound. So what sounds âÂÂnormalâ can actually be loud and harmful to your hearing. Guard against this by setting your equipment at a safe level BEFORE your hearing adapts. T o establish a safe level: ⢠Start your volume control at a low setting. ⢠Slowly increase the sound until you can hear it comfortably and clearly , and without distortion . Once you have established a comfortable sound level: ⢠Set the dial and leave it there. T aking a minute to do this now will help to prevent hearing damage or loss in the future. After all, we want you listening for a lifetime. We W ant Y ou Listening For A Lifetime Used wisely , your new sound equipment will provide a lifetime of fun and enjoyment. Since hearing damage from loud noise is often undetectable until it is too late, this manufacturer and the Electronic Industries AssociationâÂÂs Consumer Electronics Group recommend you avoid prolonged exposure to excessive noise. This list of sound levels is included for your protection. Decibel Level Example 30 Quiet librar y , soft whispers 40 Living room, refrigerator , bedroom away from traffic 50 Light traffic, normal conversation, quiet office 60 Air conditioner at 20 feet, sewing machine 70 V acuum cleaner , hair dr yer , noisy restaurant 80 Average city traffic, garbage disposals, alarm clock at two feet. THE FOLL OWING NOISES CAN BE DANGEROUS UNDER CONST ANT EXPOSURE 90 Subway , motorcycle, truck traffic, lawn mower 100 Garbage truck, chain saw , pneumatic drill 120 Rock band concert in front of speakers, thunderclap 140 Gunshot blast, jet plane 180 Rocket launching pad Information courtesy of the Deafness Research F oundation. POWER-CORD CAUTION Handle the power cord by the plug. Do not pull out the plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a piece of furniture, etc., on the power cord, or pinch the cord. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cords. The power cords should be routed such that they are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can cause a fire or give you an electrical shock. Check the power cord once in a while. When you find it damaged, ask your nearest PIONEER authorized ser vice center or your dealer for a replacement. S002_En This product includes FontAvenueî îÂÂdmlrqîÂÂjgaclacbî `wîÂÂLCAîÂÂampnmp_rgml,îÂÂDmlr?tclscîÂÂgqîÂÂ_îÂÂpcegqrcpcbî rp_bck_piîÂÂmdîÂÂLCAîÂÂAmpnmp_rgml, This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. This product is for general household purposes. Any failure due to use for other than household purposes (such as long-term use for business purposes in a restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which requires repair will be charged for even during the warranty period. K041_En DV48AV_EN.book 4 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ æÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ åÂÂ
5 En Contents 01 Before you start Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 WhatâÂÂs in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Hints on installa tion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Disc/content format playba ck compatib ility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 02 Connections Easy connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Connecting using the S-video output . . . . . 12 Connecting using the component video output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Connecting to an AV receiver . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Connecting using HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 About HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 03 Controls and displays Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Remote cont rol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Setting up the remote to control your TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 04 Getti ng start ed Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Using the on-screen displays . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Setting up the player for your TV . . . . . . . . 21 Setting the language of this playerâÂÂs on-screen displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Playing discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 05 Playing discs Scanni ng discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Playing in slow motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Frame advance/frame reverse . . . . . . . . . . 27 Viewing a JPEG slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Browsing DVD or Video CD disc with the Disc Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Browsing WMA, MP3, MPEG-4 AAC, DivX video, WMV and JPEG files with the Disc Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Looping a se ction of a d isc . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Using repeat play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Using random play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Creating a pro gram list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Searching a disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Switc hing su btitle s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Switching a udio language/channels . . . . . 34 Zooming the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Switc hing came ra angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Displaying disc information . . . . . . . . . . . 34 06 USB playback Using the USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 07 Audio Settings and Video Adjust menus Audio Settings menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Video Adjust menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 08 Initial Settings menu Using the Initial Settings menu . . . . . . . . . 38 Digital Audio Out setti ngs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Video Output settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Language settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Display settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Options settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Parent al Loc k . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Speakers settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 About t he HDMI audio output settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 HDMI output with DVD-Audio an d SACD sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 09 Additional information Taking care of your player an d discs . . . . . 51 Screen sizes and disc formats . . . . . . . . . 52 Resetting the player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 DVD-Video re gions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Selecting languages using th e language code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Language code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Country/Area code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Specific ations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 DV48AV_EN.book 5 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ æÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ åÂÂ
Before you start 01 6 En Chapter 1 Before you start Features ⢠HDMI 1 digital interface The HDMI (H igh-Definitio n Multimed ia Interface) interconnect pro vides high quality digital audio and video, all f rom a single user- friendly connector. HDMI is the first co nsumer electronics interface to support uncompressed standard, enhan ced, or high- definition vi deo plus standard to multi-channel surround sound audio, all using one interface. You can easi ly connect to a HDMI-equ ipped AV receiver or au diovisual devi ce for high quality audio an d video, and communica tion between the video source and (DTV) players, set-top boxes, and other audi ovisual devices is also supported. ⢠PureCine ma Progressive Scan video When connected to a progressive scan- compatible TV or monitor using the component video ou tputs, you can enjoy extremely stable, flicker free images, with the same frame refresh rate as the original movie. ⢠New Disc Navigator with moving pictures The new Disc Na vigator enables you pla y the first few seconds of each title or chapte r in a thumbnail ima ge on screen. ⢠DSP effects for enhanced playb ack See Audio Setti ngs and Video Adjus t menus on page 36. ⢠Picture zoom See Zooming the screen on page 34. ⢠MP3, WMA and MPEG-4 AAC compatibil ity See Compressed audio compatibil ity on page 9. ⢠JPEG compatibili ty See JPEG file co mpatibility on page 10. â¢D i v X î2 video compatibili ty See DivX video compatib ility on page 10. ⢠WMV compatibili ty See CD-R/-RW compatibility on page 8 or About WMV on page 10. ⢠Energy saving design An auto power-off funct i on switches the player into standby if not used for about 30 minutes. ⢠DVD -Audio and SACD compatib le Experience the super high-quality audio performance of DVD-Audio and Sup er Audio CD (SACD). ⢠24-bit/192 kHz compatib le DAC The on-board 24-bit/192 kHz DAC m eans that this player is fully co mpatible with high sampling-rate discs , capable of deliveri ng except ional sound q uality in terms of dynami c range, low-level resolution and high-frequency detail. 1. HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definitio n Multimedia Inte rface are trademar ks or registere d trademarks of HDMI licensing LLC. 2. DivX, DivX Ultra Certified, and associa ted logos are trademar ks of DivX, Inc. and are us ed under license. DV48AV_EN.book 6 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ æÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ åÂÂ
Before you start 01 7 En ⢠Built- in Dolby 1 Digital a nd DTS 2 decoding wi th multichannel outp uts This player features multich annel analog output s for conne ction to an AV amplif ier to give you stunning surrou nd sound from Dolby Digital, D TS and multic hannel DVD-Audi o discs. WhatâÂÂs in the box Please confirm that the following accessories are in the box when you open it. ⢠Remote control ⢠AA/R6P dry cell batteries x 2 ⢠Audio/vid eo cable (r ed/white/yellow plugs) ⢠Operating instructions Putting the batt eries in the remote ⢠Open the battery compartment cover and insert the batteries as shown. Use two AA/R6P batteries and follow the indications ( ï« , ïª ) inside the compartment. Close the cover when yo uâÂÂre finished. Important Incorrect use o f batteries can result in ha zards such as leakage and bursting. Please observe the followin g: ⢠DonâÂÂt mix new and ol d batteries to gether. ⢠DonâÂÂt use differen t kinds of battery togethe r â although they may look similar, different batteries may have different voltages. ⢠Make sure that the plus and minus ends of each battery match the indications in the battery compartme nt. ⢠Remove batteries from equipment that isnâÂÂt going to be used for a month or more. ⢠When disp osing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or environmental pub lic instructio nâÂÂs rules that apply in your country/are a. ⢠Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or other excessively hot pla ce, such as inside a car or n ear a heater. This can cause batteries to leak, overh eat, explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the life or perform ance of batteries. 1. Manufac tured und er licens e from Dolb y Laborato ries. âÂÂDol by âÂÂ, âÂÂPro L ogicâÂÂ, an d the double -D symbol are trademark s of Dolby Laboratories. 2. âÂÂDTSâ and âÂÂDTS Digital Surroundâ are regi stered trad emarks o f DTS, In c. DV48AV_EN.book 7 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ æÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ åÂÂ
Before you start 01 8 En Hints on installation We want you to enjo y using this product for years to come, so please use the following guidelines when choo sing a suit able locatio n: Do... ⢠Use in a wel l-ventilate d room. ⢠Place on a solid, flat, level surface, such as a table, shelf or stereo rack. DonâÂÂt... ⢠Use in a place exposed to h igh temperatures or humid ity, includin g near radiators and other heat-generating appliances. ⢠Place on a window sill or a place where the player will be exposed to direct sunlight. ⢠Use in an excessively dusty or damp environment. ⢠Plac e directly on top of an amplifier, or other component in your stereo system that becomes hot in use. ⢠Use near a television or monitor as you may experience interference â especially if the television uses an in door antenna. ⢠Use in a kitchen or other room wh ere the player may be exposed to smoke or steam. ⢠Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cov er with cloth â this may prevent proper cooling of the unit. ⢠Place on an unsta ble surface, or one that is not la rge enough t o support a ll four of the unitâÂÂs feet. Disc/content format playback compatibility This player is co mpatible with a w ide range of disc types (media) and formats. Playable discs will generally feature one of the followin g logos on the disc and/or di sc packaging. Note however that some disc types, such as recordable CD and DVD , may be in an unplayable form at â see below for further compatib ility informat ion. Please also no te that recordable dis cs cannot be recorded using this player. ⢠This unit wil l play DVD R/ RW discs. ⢠is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Co rporation. ⢠is a trademark of FUJIFILM Corporation. ⢠Als o compatible with KODAK Picture CD About DualDisc playba ck A DualDisc is a new two -sided disc, one side of which co ntains DVD content video, audio, etc. whil e the othe r side cont ains non- DVD content such as digi tal audio material. The non-DVD, audio side of the disc is not compliant with the CD Au dio specification and therefore may not play. The DVD side of a Dua lDisc plays in this product. DVD-Audio content will not play. For more de tailed informa tion on the DualDisc specification, pl ease refer to the disc manufacturer o r disc retailer. CD-R/-RW compatibility ⢠Compatible formats: CD-Au dio, Video CD, ISO 9660 CD-ROM* containing MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC, JPEG o r DivX video/ WMV files * ISO 9660 Leve l 1 or 2 complian t. CD physical format: Mod e1, Mode2 XA Form1. Romeo and Jol iet file sy stems are both compatibl e with this pl ayer. DVD- Video DVD-R DVD-RW Video CD Audio CD CD-R CD-RW DVD-Audio Super Audio CD F ujicolor CD DV48AV_EN.book 8 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ æÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ åÂÂ
Before you start 01 9 En ⢠Mul ti-ses sion playba ck: No ⢠Unfinal ized disc playbac k: No ⢠File structure (may differ): Up to 299 folders on a disc; u p to 648 folders and files (combined) within each folder DVD R/DVD RW compatibility Only DVD R/DVD RW discs recorded in âÂÂVideo Mode (DVD Video Mode)â which have been finalized, can be played back. However, some editing made during the recording may not be played back ac curately. DVD-R/-RW compatibility ⢠Compatibl e formats: DVD-Video, Video Recording (VR)* * Edi t points may not play exactly as edited; screen may go momentaril y blank at edited points. ⢠Unfinalized p layback: N o ⢠MP3/WMA/MPEG-4 AAC/JPEG or DivX video/WMV file playbac k on DVD-R/-RW: No Compressed audio compatibility ⢠Compatible formats: MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 (MP3), Windows Media Audio (WMA), MPEG-4 AAC ⢠Sampling rates: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz ⢠Bit-rates: Any (128 kbps or higher recommended) ⢠VBR (variable bit rate) MP3/WMA/MPEG-4 AAC playback: No ⢠WMA lossless encodi ng compatible: No ⢠DRM (Digital Rights Ma nagement) compatib le: No (DRM-p rotected au dio files will not play in this playerâÂÂsee also DRM in the Glossary on page 59) ⢠File extensions: .mp3, .wma, .m4a (these must be used for the player to recognize MP3, WMA and M PEG-4 AAC files â do not use for other file types) About MPEG-4 AAC Advanced Audio Coding (AAC) is a t the core of the MPEG-4 AAC standard, which incorporates MPEG-2 AAC, forming the basis of the MPEG- 4 audio compr ession techn ology. The file format and extension used de pend on the application used to encode the AA C file. This unit plays back AAC files encoded by iTunes î bearing the extensio n â .m4a âÂÂ. DRM- protected files will not play, and files encoded with some versions of iTunes î may not play, or filenames may display incorrectly. Apple and i Tunes are tradema rks of Apple In c., registere d in the U.S. and other countries. WMA (Windows Media⢠Audio) compatibility This player can playback Windows Media Audio c ontent. WMA i s an acr onym fo r Wind ows Media Audio and refers to an audio compression technology developed by Microsoft Corporation. WMA conten t can be encoded by using Windows Media Pl ayer for Windows XP, Windows Media Player 9 or Windows Media Player 10 series. Windows Media is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation. This product incl udes technology owned by Microsof t Corporation and cannot be used or distributed withou t a license from Microsoft Licensi ng, Inc. About DivX video DivX is a media technology created by DivX, Inc. DivX me dia files co ntain not only video but also include advanced media features like menus, subtitl es, and alt ernate audio tracks. This player can play DivX videos burned on CD-R/-RW/-ROM discs. Keeping the same terminology as DVD-Video, individual DivX video file s are called âÂÂTitlesâÂÂ. Wh en naming files/titles on a CD-R/-RW disc p rior to burning, keep in m ind that by defau lt they will be played in alphabetical order. DV48AV_EN.book 9 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ æÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ åÂÂ
Before you start 01 10 En Displaying external subtitle file s The font sets list ed below are availabl e for external subtitle files. You can see the proper font set on-screen by setting the Sub title Language (in Language set tings on page 41) to match the subtitle file. This player supports t he following language groups: ⢠Some external subtitle files may be displayed incorrectly o r not at all. ⢠For external sub title files th e followin g subtitle format filename extensions are supported (please note that these files are not show n within the disc n avigation menu): .srt, .sub, .ssa, .smi ⢠The filename of the movie file has to be repeated at the beginning of the filename for the external subtitle file. ⢠The number of external subtitle files which can be switched for th e same movie file is limited to a maximum of 10. DivX video compatibility ⢠Official DivX î Ultra Certified produc t. ⢠Plays all versions of DivX î video (including DivX î 6) with enhanced playback of DivX î media file s and the DivX î Media Fo rmat. ⢠File extensions: .avi and .divx (these must be used for the player to recognize DivX video files). Note that all files with the .avi extensi on are recogn ized as MP EG4, but n ot all of these are necess arily DivX video files ã and therefore may not be playa ble on this player. About WMV WMV is an acronym for W indows Media Video and refers to a video compression technology developed by Microsof t Co rporation. WMV content ca n be encode d by using Wind ows Media î Encoder. ⢠This player is comp atible with WMV9 fi les that are encoded by using the Windo ws Media î Encoder 9 Se ries, with .wmv as an extension. ⢠Compatible with size under 720 x 480 pixels. ⢠Advanced Profi le is not supported. ⢠DRM-protect ed video file s will not p lay in this player. JPEG file compatibility ⢠Compat ible formats: Baseline JPEG and EXIF 2.2* still image fi les up to a resolutio n of 3072 x 2048. * File fo rmat used by di gital still ca meras. ⢠Progressive JPEG compatible: No ⢠File extensions: .jpg (m ust be used fo r the player to rec ognize JPEG f iles â do not use for other file typ es) PC-created disc compatibility Discs re corded using a pe rsonal c omputer may not be playable in this unit due to the setting of the application software used to create the disc. In these particula r instances, check with the software publisher for more detailed information. Discs recorded in packet write mode (UD F format) are not c ompatible with this p layer. Check the DVD-R/-RW or CD-R/-RW software disc boxes for additi onal compatibil ity information. Group 1 Albanian (sq), Basque (eu), Catalan (ca), Danish (da), Dutch (nl), English (en), Faroese (fo), Finnish (fi), French (fr), German (de), Ic elandic (is), Irish (ga), Italian (it), Norwegian (no), Portuguese (pt), Rhaeto-Romanic (rm), Scottish (gd), Spanish (es), Swedish (sv) Group 2 Albanian (sq), Croatian (hr), Czech (cs), Hungarian (hu), Polish (pl), Romanian (ro), Slovak (sk), Slovenian (sl) Group 3 Bulgarian (bg ), Byelorussian (be), Macedonian (mk), Russian (ru ), Serbian (sr), Ukrainian (uk) Group 4 Hebrew (iw), Yiddish (ji) Group 5 Tu rkish (tr) DV48AV_EN.bo ok 10 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connections 02 11 En Chapter 2 Connections Easy connections Important ⢠Before making or changing any connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cable from the AC outlet. ⢠The setup desc ribed here is a bas ic setup that allows you to pl ay discs using just the cables supplied with the player. In this setup, stereo au dio is played through the spea kers in your TV. ⢠This player is equipped with copy protection technology. Do not connect this player to your TV via a VCR using audio/video or S- video cables , as the picture from th is player will not appear properly on you r TV. (This player may also not be compatible with some combination TV/VCRs for the same reason; ref er to the manufacturer for m ore information.) 1 Connect the VIDEO OUT and AUDIO OUT (5.1ch)/AUDIO OUT L/R jac ks to a set of A/V inputs on your TV. Use the supplied audio/video cabl e, connecting the red and white plugs to the audio outputs and the yellow plu g to the video output. Make sure you m atch up the left and right audio outputs with th eir corresponding inputs for correc t stereo sound. See below if you want to use a component or S-video cable for the video co nnection. 2 Plug into a power outlet. Note ⢠Before unplugging the player fro m the power outlet, make sure you first switch it into standby using eith er the front panel ïµ STANDBY/ON button, or the remote control, and wait of th e -OFF- mess age to disappear from the playerâÂÂs display. ⢠For the above reasons, do no t plug this player into a switche d power supply found on some amplifiers and AV receiver s. P R P B Y COMPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT (5.1ch) DIGITAL AUDIO OUT OPTICAL SL SR HDMI OUT SW C L R COAXIAL To audio/video inputs Y ellow White Red TV To power outlet DV48AV_EN.bo ok 11 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connections 02 12 En Connecting using the S-video output If your TV (or other equipment) has an S-video (S1) input, you can use the S-video output on this player instead of the standard (composite) output for a better quality picture. ⢠Use an S-video cab le (not supplied) to connect the S-VIDEO OUT to an S-vide o input on your TV (or mo nitor or AV receiver). Line up the small triangle above the jack with th e s a m e ma r k o n th e p l u g b e f o r e p l u g g in g i n . Connecting using the component video output You can use the co mponent video output instead of the standard video out jack to connect this player to your TV (or other equipm ent). This sh ould give you the best quality picture from the th ree types of video output availabl e. ⢠Use a component vi deo cable (not supplied) to conn ect the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks to a component video input on you r TV, monitor or AV receiver. P R P B Y COMPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT (5.1ch) SL SR HDMI OUT SW C L R TV To S-video input P R P B Y COMPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT (5.1ch) SL SR HDMI OUT SW C L R TV To component video input DV48AV_EN.bo ok 12 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connections 02 13 En Watching progressive scan video from the component video outputs This player can output progressive scan video from the component video o utput. Compared to interlace video, pr ogressive scan video effectively doubles the scanning rate of the picture, result ing in a very st able, flicker-f ree image. To set up the player for use with a progressive scan TV, see Video Output settings on page 40. When the player is set to output progressive scan video, the PRGSVE indicator lights in the front pan el displa y. Important ⢠If you connect a TV that is no t compatibl e with a progressive scan signal and switch the player to progressive, yo u will not be able to see any pi cture at all. In th is case, switch everything off and reco nnect using the supplied video cable (see Easy connections on page 11), then switch back to Interlace (see below). Switch ing the video output to interlace using the front panel controls Switch the player to standby then, using the front p anel cont rols, pre ss ïµ STANDBY/O N while pressing ï¯ to switch the player back to Interlace . ⢠If the player is connected using HDMI, disconnect the HDMI cable before resetting the player to interlace out put. (If left connected, the HDMI output resolution will be reset to its defaul t â see Resetting the output resolution to the default setting with HDMI connection on page 16.) Connecting to an AV receiver You can connec t this player to your AV receiver using the multicha nnel analog outp uts or one of the dig ital outputs. In addition to these connections, you sho uld also connect th e 2 channel analog o utputs for compat ibility wi th all dis cs. YouâÂÂll probably also want to connect a video output to your AV receiver. You can use any of the video outputs available on this player (the illustration shows a st andard (composite) connectio n). 1 Connect the an alog AUDIO OUT (5.1ch)/AUDIO OUT L/R and VIDEO OUT jacks on thi s player to a se t of analog au dio and video inpu ts on your AV receiver. 2 Connect the AV receiverâÂÂs vi deo output to a video inpu t on your TV. You can also use the S-video or component video jacks to connect to the AV re ceiver if you prefer. Tip ⢠You usually have to connect the same kind of video cable be tween your DVD player and AV receiver, and between your AV receiver and TV. ïµï STANDBY/ON USB DVD/USB HDMI ï§ ïÂÂ¥ ï¯ï° ïµ STANDBY/ON ï¯ P R P B Y COMPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT (5.1ch) SL SR HDMI OUT SW C L R AV r eceiver To audio/video inputs DV48AV_EN.bo ok 13 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connections 02 14 En Connecting the multichannel analog outputs If your AV rece iver has 5.1 channel analog inputs, we recommend co nnecting this player to it usin g the mult ichannel anal og outputs . Doing this will ensure that you can enjoy all kinds of disc, including Dolby Digi tal and DTS DVD-Video discs, as well as high sampling rate and multic hannel DVD-Audio and SACD discs. ⢠Connect the multi -channel audio outputs on this player to the mul ti-channel audio inputs on your AV receiver. ItâÂÂs convenient to use three stereo audio cables; one for the FRONT , one for th e SURROUN D and one for the CENTER and SUBWOOFER channe ls. You can also use the S-video or co mponent video jacks to connect to th e AV receiver if you prefer. Tip ⢠After connecting up and switc hing on, you should change the Audio Output Mode setting in the Initial Setup menu from the default 2 Channel to 5.1 Ch anne l . See also Audio Output Mo de on page 45. Connecting the digital output This player h as both o ptical and coax ial-type digital audio outp uts for connection to an AV receiver. Connect whichever is co nvenient. Depending on the capabilities of you r AV receiver, you might have to set up th is player to outpu t only digit al audio in a compatib le format . See Digital Audi o Out settings on page 39 and refer to the operating instructio ns that came with yo ur AV receiver. Note that SACD au dio is not output through these jack s, so this connec tion shou ld be in additi on to, rather than instead of, a 5.1 channel analo g connection. ⢠Connect one of the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jacks on this play er to a digital input on your AV recei ver. For an optical conn ection, use an optical ca ble (not supplied) to connect the OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OU T jack to an optica l input on your AV receiver. For a co axial connecti on, use a coaxi al cable (similar to the supplied video cable) to connect the COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO O UT jack to a coaxial i nput on your A V receiver. P R P B Y COMPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT (5.1ch) SL SR HDMI OUT SW C L R AV r eceiver To multi-channel audio inputs DIGITAL AUDIO OUT OPTICAL COAXIAL AV r eceiver To coaxial/optical digital input DV48AV_EN.bo ok 14 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connections 02 15 En Connecting using HDMI If you have a HDMI equipped monitor or display, you can connect it to this player using a commercially av ailable HDMI cabl e. The HDMI connect or outputs uncompressed digital video, as well as almo st every kind of digital audio that the player i s compatible wi th, including DVD-Video, DVD-Audio (see belo w for limitations), SACD, Video CD, CD, WMA , MP3, MPEG-4 AAC, DivX video an d WMV. ⢠Use an HDMI cable to connect the HDMI OUT interconnect on th is player to an HDMI intercon nect on a HDMI- compatible display. The arrow on the cable connector body should be face up for co rrect alignment with the connector on the player . Note ⢠Thi s unit has been designed to be compliant wit h HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Int erface). Dep ending on the component you ha ve connected, using a DVI connection may result in unreli able signal transfers. ⢠When you change the component connected to the HDMI output, you will also need to change the HDMI settin gs to match the new compon ent (see HDMI Out on page 39, HDMI Resolution and HDMI Color o n page 40 to do this). However, the settings for each co mponent are then stored in memory (for up to 2 components). ⢠The HDMI con nection is c ompatible w ith 2 channel linea r PCM signals (44.1 kHz to 192 kHz, 16 bit/20 bit/24 bit), and Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG audio bit stream, multi channel DS D, and multi c hannel linear PCM signals, (5.1 chan nel si gnals up to 96 kHz, 16 bit/20 bit/24 bit). P R P B Y COMPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT (5.1ch) SL SR HDMI OUT SW C L R HDMI-compatible display To HDMI interconnect DV48AV_EN.bo ok 15 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connections 02 16 En About HDMI HDMI (Hi gh-Definit ion Multim edia Inte rface) supports both video an d audio on a sin gle digital connection for use with DVD players, DTV, set-top boxes, and other AV devices. HDMI was developed to provide the technologies of High-b andwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP) a s well as Di gital Visual Interface (DVI) in one specification . HDCP is u sed to prot ect digi tal conten t transmitted and received by DVI-complia nt displays. HDMI has the capability to support standard, enhanced, or high-defin ition video plus standard to multi-channel surround-so und audio. HDMI features include unco mpressed digital video, a bandwidth of up to five gigaby tes per sec ond (wit h HDTV sign als), on e connector (instead of several cables and connectors), and communication between the AV source and AV devices such as DTVs. Resetting the output resolution to the default setting w ith HDMI connection Switch the player to standby then, using the front p anel cont rols, pre ss ïµ STANDBY/O N while pressing ï¯ to switch the player back to 480P . You can also use the HDMI RESOLUTION button on the remote control to sw itch the player back to 480P . ïµï STANDBY/ON USB DVD/USB HDMI ï§ ïÂÂ¥ ï¯ï° ïµ STANDBY/ON ï¯ HDMI RESOLUTION DV48AV_EN.bo ok 16 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 17 En Chapter 3 Controls and displays Front panel 1 ïµ STANDBY/ON (pa ge 20) 2 Disc tray 3T O P M E N U (page 24) 4 ENTER & cursor buttons (page 20) 5M E N U (page 24) 6 RETURN (page 24) 7H O M E M E N U (page 20) 8D i s p l a y 9 ï¨ OPEN/CLOSE (page 22) 10 ï¤ (page 23) 11 ïÂÂ¥ (page 23) 12 ï§ (page 23) 13 ï¯ and ï° (page 23) 14 HDMI indi cator Lights when this pla yer is recognized by another HDMl or DVI/HD CP compatible component. 15 DVD/USB (page 35) 16 USB port (Typ e A) (page 35) 17 RW C ompatib le (page 9) MENU TOP MENU ïµï STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE USB DVD/USB HDMI HOME MENU RETURN ï§ ï¨ ïÂÂ¥ ï¤ ï¯ï° ENTER 2 3 4 5 1 7 6 8 10 9 17 14 15 16 11 12 13 DV48AV_EN.bo ok 17 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 18 En Remote control Tip ⢠All butt ons glow slightly in the dark for ease of use. 1 ïµ STANDBY/ON (page 2 0) 2 FL DIMMER Press to change the display bright ness. 3 Number buttons (page 23) 4C L E A R (page 32) 5 AUDIO (page 34) 6 SUBTITLE (page 33) 7T O P M E N U (pa ge 24) 8 ENTER & cursor buttons (page 20) 9H O M E M E N U (pa ge 20) 10 SURROUND (page 36) 11 PLAY MODE (page 30) 12 ï and ï³/ï± (page 23, 27) 13 ï¤ PLAY (page 23) 14 ï¯ PREV (page 23) 15 ïÂÂ¥ PAUSE (page 23) 16 ï¨ OPEN/CLOSE (page 22) 17 HDMI COLOR (page 40) 18 HDMI RESOLUTION /â (page 16, 40) 19 EN TER (page 20) 20 DVD/USB (page 35) 21 ANGLE (page 34) 22 MENU (page 24) 23 RETURN (page 20) 24 ZOOM (page 34) 25 DISPLAY (page 34) 26 ï® and ï²/ï´ (page 23, 27) 27 ï° NEXT (page 23) 28 ï§ STOP (page 23) 29 TV CONTROL (page 19) DVD STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE TOP MENU RETURN MENU HOME MENU HDMI COLOR AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE DVD/ USB PLAY MODE SURROUND ZOOM DISPL AY ENTER ENTER TV CONTROL PLAY VOLUME CHANNEL ïµ ï¨ INPUT SELECT ïµ FL DIMMER CLEAR HDMI RESOLUTION PA USE NEXT PREV STOP ï³ï¯ï± ï²ï¯ï´ 2 1 7 8 12 4 5 9 11 13 16 20 18 17 22 23 24 25 3 6 10 14 15 19 21 26 27 28 29 DV48AV_EN.bo ok 18 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 19 En Using the re mote control Keep in mind the following when usin g the remote contro l: ⢠Make sure that there are no obstacles between t he remote an d the remote sensor on the unit. ⢠The remote has a range of about 23 feet. ⢠Remote operation may become unreliable if strong s unlight or fl uorescent lig ht is shining on the unitâÂÂs rem ote sensor. ⢠Remote controllers for different devices can interfere with ea ch other. Avoid us ing remotes for other equipm ent located close to this unit. ⢠Replace the batteries when you no tice a fall off in th e operating range of the remote. Setting up the remote to control your TV You can use the supplied remote to control your TV. To be able to use this feature yo u first have to program the remo te with a maker code from the table below. 1 Press and ho ld down the CLEAR button, then enter the m aker code for your TV. See the table below for the list of maker codes. If there is more than on e code given for your make, input the first one in the l ist. ⢠If the makerâÂÂs name of you r TV doesnâÂÂt appear in the table below, yo u will not be able to use this remote to control your TV. 2P r e s s ïµ TV to check that the remote works with your TV. If the remote is set up correctly, the TV should switch on/off. If it doesnâÂÂt and th ere is another code given for your mak er, repeat step 1 with a new code. Using t he TV remote control buttons The table below shows how to use this remote control with your TV. Button What it does ïµ TV P ress to switch the TV on/off (standby) INPUT SELECT P ress to change the TVâÂÂs video input VOLUME /â Use to adjust the TV volume CHANNEL /â Use to change TV channels Maker Code Aiwa 38 Fu n a i 3 6 GE 11, 28 General 34 Goldstar 10, 23 Grandiente 30 Hitachi 06, 24, 25, 32 Magnavox 12, 29 Mitsubishi 09 NEC 37 P anasonic 08, 22, 41 Philips 0 7 P ioneer 00, 35, 40, 44 RCA 01, 15, 16, 17, 18 Samsung 73, 75 Sanyo 14, 21 Sharp 02, 19, 27 Sony 04 T oshiba 05, 26, 31, 43 JVC 13, 33, 42 Zenith 03, 20 DV48AV_EN.bo ok 19 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 20 En Chapter 4 Getting started Switching on After making sure that everything is conne cted properly and th at the player is plugged in, press ïµ STANDBY/ON on the front pane l or remote control to switch the player on . Also, switch on your TV a nd make sure that it is set to the input you connected the DVD player to. FAQ ⢠My DV D player switches on but there i s nothing disp layed on my TV. Make sure th at the TV is set to th e correct video input (not a TV channel) . For example, if you conne cted this player to the VIDEO 1 inputs on your TV, switch your TV to VIDEO 1 . Note ⢠This player features a screen saver and an auto power of f function. If the pla yer is stopped and no button is pressed for around five minutes, the screen saver starts. If the disc tray is c losed but no disc is playing and no con trol is press ed for about 30 minutes, the player automatically goes into standby. Using the on-screen displays For ease of use, this pla yer makes extensive use of graphical on-screen displays (OSDs). All th e screens are navigate d in basically the same way, using the cursor buttons ( ï©/ïª /ï«/ ï¬ ) to change th e highlighted item and pressing ENTE R to select it. Note ⢠From here on in this manual, the word âÂÂselectâ generally m eans use the cursor buttons to highlig ht an item on- screen, then press ENT ER . ïµï STANDBY/ON USB DVD/USB HDMI ï¯ï° ïµ STANDBY/ON Button What it does HOME MENU Display/exit the on-screen display . ï©/ïª/ï«/ï¬ Changes the highlighted menu item. ENTER Selects the highlighted menu item (both ENTER buttons on the remote work in exactly the same way). RETURN R eturns to the main menu without saving changes. RETURN HOME MENU ENTER ENTER MENU TOP MENU OPEN/CLOSE HOME MENU RETURN ï¨ ï¤ ENTER ENTER DV48AV_EN.bo ok 20 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 21 En Setting up the player for your TV If you have a wide screen (16:9) TV, you should setup the player so that the picture will be presented correctly. If you have a conventional (4:3) TV, you can leave the player on the default setting and move on to the next section . 1 Press HOME MENU an d select âÂÂInitial SettingsâÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂTV Scree nâ from the âÂÂVideo Outputâ settings. 3 If you have a widescree n (16:9) TV, select âÂÂ16:9 (Wid e)â or âÂÂ16:9 (Compressed)âÂÂ. If you have a con ventional (4:3) TV, you can change the setting from 4:3 (Let ter Box) to 4:3 (Pan & Scan) if you prefer. See Vide o Output settings on page 40 for more details. 4 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu screen. Setting the language of this playerâÂÂs on-screen displays This sets the language of the playerâÂÂs on- screen displays. 1 Press H OME MENU and sel ect âÂÂInitial SettingsâÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂOSD Languageâ from the âÂÂDisplayâ s ettings. 3 Select a l anguage. The on-sc reen language w ill change according to your selection. 4 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu screen. Initial Settings Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers TV Screen Component Out HDMI Resolution HDMI Color 4:3 (Letter Box) 4:3 (Pan&Scan) 16:9 (Wide) 16:9 (Compressed) Initial Settings Initial Settings Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers OSD Language Angle Indicator English français Deutsch Italiano Español Initial Settings DV48AV_EN.bo ok 21 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 22 En Playing discs The basic playba ck controls for play ing DVD, CD, SACD, Video CD, DivX video/WMV and MP3/WMA/MPEG-4 AAC discs are covered here. Further functions are detailed in the n ext chapter. For details on playing JPEG picture discs, see Viewing a JPE G slidesh ow on page 28. Important ⢠Throughout this manual, the term âÂÂDVDâ means DVD-Video, DVD-Audio and DVD-R/-RW. If a fun ction is specific to a particula r kind of DV D disc, it is specified. 1 If the player isnâÂÂt already on, press ïµ STANDBY/ON to switch it o n. If youâÂÂre playin g a DVD, disc con taining DivX video/WMV files or Video C D , a l s o t u r n o n y o u r TV and make sure that it is se t to the correct video input. 2P r e s s ï¨ OPEN/CLOSE to open the di sc tray. 3 Load a disc. Load a disc with the label side facing up, us ing the disc tray guide to a lign the disc (if youâÂÂre loading a double -sided DVD disc, load it wit h the side you want to play fac e down). 4 Press ï¤ (play) to start playback. If youâÂÂre playing a DVD or Video CD, an on- screen menu may appear. See DVD-Vi deo and DivX disc menus on p age 24 and Video CD PBC menus o n p a g e 2 5 f o r m o r e o n h o w t o n a v i g a t e these. ⢠If youâÂÂre playing a co ntaining DivX video/ WMV files or MP3/WMA /MPEG-4 AAC audio files, it may take a few seconds before playback sta rts, etc. This is normal. ⢠Please see Disc/cont ent format playback compa tibilit y on page 8 if you want to play a DualDisc (DVD/CD hybrid disc) . Note ⢠You may find with some DVD discs that some playback controls donâÂÂt work i n certain parts of the disc. This is not a malfunction. ⢠If a disc cont ains a mixt ure of movie (DivX video/WMV) and other media file types (MP3, for example), first select wh ether to play the movie files ( DivX/WMV )o r the other media file types ( MP3/WMA/MPEG- 4 AAC/JPEG ) from the on-screen display. STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE ENTER ENTER PLAY ïµ ï¨ PAUS E STOP ï³ï¯ï± ï²ï¯ï´ DV48AV_EN.bo ok 22 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 23 En Basic playback controls The table below shows the basic controls on the remote for playin g discs. The foll owing chapter covers other playback fe atures in more deta il. Resume and Last Memory With the exception of DVD-Audio and SACD discs, when you stop playback of a DVD, CD, or Video CD or DivX video/WMV discs, RESUME is shown in the dis play indicat ing that you can resume playba ck again from that point. If the di sc tray is not opened, the next time you start playback the display shows R ESUME and playback resumes from the resume point. (If you want to clear the resume point, press ï§ (st op) whil e RESUME is displayed.) With DVDs and Video CDs, if you take th e disc out of the player after stop ping playback, the last play position is stored in memory. If the next disc you load is the same one, the display shows LAST MEM and playback wi ll resume. For DVD-Video discs, the player sto res the play position of the last five discs. When one of these discs is next loaded, you ca n resume playback. Note ⢠The Last Memory function doesnâÂÂt work with VR format DVD-R/-RW, DVD-Audio or SACD disc s. ⢠If you donâÂÂt need the Last Memory function when you stop a disc, you can press ï¨ OPEN/CLOSE to stop playback and open the disc tray. Button What it does ï¤ Starts playback. If the display shows RESUME or LAST MEM playback starts from the resume or last memory point (see also Resume and Last Memory below. ) ïÂÂ¥ P auses a disc thatâÂÂs playing, or restarts a paused disc. ï§ Stops playback. See also Resume and Last Memory below. ï (remote only) P ress to start fast reverse scanning. Pr e ss ï¤ (play) to resume normal playback. ï® (remote only) P ress to start fast forward scanning. Pr e ss ï¤ (play) to resume normal playback. ï¯ Skips to the start of the current track, title or chapter , then to previous tracks/titl es/chapters. ï° Skips to the next track, title or chapt er . Numbers (remote only) Use to enter a title/chapter/track number . P ress ENTER to select. ⢠If the disc is stopped, playback starts from the selected title (for DVD), group (for DVD-Audio) or track (for CD/SACD/Video CD). ⢠If the disc is playing, playback jumps to the start of the selected title (VR mode DVD -RW), chapter (DVD - V ideo) or track (DVD -Audio*/ SACD/CD/Video CD). *within the current group DV48AV_EN.bo ok 23 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 24 En DVD-Video and DivX disc menus Some DivX me dia files and ma ny DVD-Vide o and DVD-Audio discs feat ure menus from which you can select what you want to watch. They may also give a ccess to additional features, such as subtit le and audio language selection, or specia l features such as slideshow s. See the disc packaging fo r details. Sometimes DivX and DVD-Video menus are displayed automatically when yo u start playback; others onl y appear when you press MENU or TOP MENU . Important ⢠Some DVD-Audio discs feature a âÂÂbonus groupâÂÂ. To play this g roup you first have to input a password, which you can find on the discâÂÂs packaging. Use the number buttons to input the password. TOP MENU RETURN MENU ENTER ENTER Button What it does TOP MENU Displays the âÂÂtop menuâ of a DVD disc â this varies with the disc. MENU Displays a DVD disc (or DivX media files) menu â this varies with the disc and may be the same as the âÂÂtop menuâÂÂ. ï©/ïª/ï«/ï¬ Moves the cursor around the screen. ENTER Selects the current menu option. RETURN R eturns to the previously dis- played menu screen. On some DVD-Audi o discs featuring brows- able pictures, press to display the browser screen. Numbers (remote only) Highlights a numbered menu option (some discs only). P ress ENTER to select. DV48AV_EN.bo ok 24 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 25 En Video CD PBC menus Some Video CDs have menus from which you can choose what you want to watch. These are called PBC (Playback co ntrol) menus. You can play a PBC Video CD without having to navigate the PBC menu by starting play back using a number button to select a track, rather than the ï¤ (play) button. FAQ ⢠Afte r I load a DVD disc, it ej ects automatically after a few seconds! Most likely, the disc is the wrong region for your player. The region numbe r should be printed on the disc; check it agains t the region number of the player (which you can find on the rea r panel). See also DVD- Video regions on page 53. If the region number is OK , it may be that the disc is damaged or dirty. Clean t he disc and look for signs of damage. S ee also Taking care of your player and discs on page 51. ⢠Why wonâÂÂt the disc I loaded play? First check that you loaded the disc the right way up (label side up), and that itâÂÂs clean and undamaged. See Taking care of your player and disc s on page 51 for information on cleaning discs. If a disc loaded cor r ectly wonâÂÂt play, itâÂÂs probabl y an incomp atible for mat or disc type, such as DVD-ROM . See Disc/content format playback compatibility on page 8 for more on disc compatibil ity. ⢠I have a widescreen TV so why are there black bars at the top and bottom of the screen when I play some disc s? Some movie formats are such that e ven when played on a widescreen TV, black bars are necessa ry at the top and bo ttom of the screen. This is not a malfunction. ⢠I have a standard (4:3 ) TV and set the player to show wide screen DVDs in pan & scan format, so why do I still ge t black bars top and bottom with some discs? Some discs override the display preferences of the player, so even if you have 4:3 (Pan & Scan) selected, those discs will still be shown in letter box format. This is not a malf unction. Button What it does RETURN Displays the PBC menu. Numbers (remote only) Use to enter a numbered menu option . P ress ENTER to select. ï¯ Displays the previou s menu page (if there is one). ï° Displays the next menu page (if there is one). RETURN ENTER ENTER PLAY CLEAR DV48AV_EN.bo ok 25 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 26 En ⢠IâÂÂve connec ted to a HDMI com patible component but I canâÂÂt get any signal and the front panel HDMI indicator wonâÂÂt l ight! Make sure that youâÂÂve selected this player as the HDMI input in the settings for the component youâÂÂre usin g. You may need to refer to the instruction manual of the component to do th is. See Connecting using HDMI on page 15 for more on HD MI compatib ility. ⢠Thereâ s no picture from the HDMI output! This player cannot display pictures from DVI compatible sourc es. See Connecting using HDMI on page 15 for more on HD MI compatib ility. Make sure the resolutio n on this player matches that of the component you h ave connected using HD MI. See HDMI Resolut ion on page 40 to change the HDMI resolution. ⢠My AV receiv er is defi nitely c ompatible with 96 kHz/88.2 kHz Linear PCM au dio, but it doesnâÂÂt seem to work with this p layer. WhatâÂÂs wrong? For digital c opy-protection purposes, some 96 kHz/88.2 kHz DVD discs only output digital audio downsample d to 48 kHz/ 44.1 kHz. Th is is not a m alfunction . To fully take adva ntage of the high sampling rate audio, co nnect the analog audio outputs to your amplifier/receiver. ⢠Why canâÂÂt I hear SACD audio through the digital output s? SACD digit al audio is only availabl e through th e HDMI output s when connected to an HDMI-co mpatible amp that can handle pr otected audio contents. Some DVD-A udio discs too only outp ut audio through the a nalog outputs. ⢠I s it better to li sten to DVD-Audio discs through the analog outputs? Some DVD-Audio discs do not output anything through the digital outputs, and multichannel discs are downmixed to stereo for the digital ou tput. In addition, high sampling rate DVD-Audio discs (higher than 96 kHz) automatically downsample audio output from the digital outputs. Using the multichannel analog audi o outputs for DVD-Audio have none of these limitations. ⢠My DVD- Audio disc starts playi ng, but then suddenly stops! The disc may have been illegally copied. DV48AV_EN.bo ok 26 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 27 En Chapter 5 Playing di scs Note ⢠Many of the functions covered in th is chapter app ly to DVD and S ACD discs, Video CDs, CDs, DivX video/WMV and MP3/W MA/MPEG-4 AAC/ JPEG discs, altho ugh the exact ope ration of some varies slightl y with the kind of disc loaded. ⢠Some DVDs restrict the use of some functions (rando m or repeat, for exampl e) in some or all parts of the disc. This is not a malfunction . ⢠When playing Vi deo CDs, some of the functions are no t available du ring PBC playback. If you want to use them, start the disc playing using a number button to select a track. Scanning discs You can fast-scan discs forward or backward at four different speeds (only one speed fo r DivX video/WMV). 1 Durin g playback , press ï or ï® to start scanning. ⢠There is no sound while scan ning DVDs (including DVD-Au di o), DivX video/WMV and Video CDs. 2 Press repeatedly to increase the scanning speed. ⢠The scanning speed is shown on-screen. 3 To resume normal playback, press ï¤ (play) . ⢠Whe n scanning a Video CD playing in P BC mode or a MP3/WMA/M PEG-4 AAC track, playback automatica lly resumes at the end or beginning of the tr ack. ⢠Depending on the disc, normal playba ck may automatically resume when a new chapter is rea ched on a DVD disc. Playing in slow motion You can play DVD-Videos and DVD-R/-RW at four different slow motion speeds, for wards and backwards. Video CDs and DivX video/ WMV can b e played at four different forward slow motion speeds. 1 During playback, press ïÂÂ¥ (pause). 2 Press an d hold ï³/ï± or ï²/ï´ un til slow motion pl ayback starts. ⢠The sl ow motion speed is shown on- screen. ⢠T here is no so und during sl ow motion playback. 3 Press repeatedly to change the slow motion speed. 4 To resume normal playback, press ï¤ (play). ⢠Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached. Frame advance/frame reverse You can advanc e or back up D VD-Video and DVD-R/-RW discs frame-by- frame. With Video CDs and DivX video/WMV file you can only use frame advance. 1 During playback, press ïÂÂ¥ (pause). 2 Press ï³/ï± or ï²/ï´ to reverse or advance a frame at a time. 3 To resume normal playback, press ï¤ (play). ⢠Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached. DV48AV_EN.bo ok 27 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 28 En Viewing a JPEG slideshow After loadin g a CD/CD-R/- RW containing JPEG picture files, press ï¤ (play) to start a slideshow from the first folder/picture on the disc. The player displays the pictures in ea ch folder in alphabetical order . ⢠If the folder contains MP3/WMA/ MPEG-4 AAC files, playback of the slideshow and MP3/WMA/ MPEG-4 AAC file repeats. During the audio playback, yo u can still u se the skip ( ï¯/ ï° ), scan ( ïÂÂ/ï® ) and pause (ïÂÂ¥ ) functions. Pictures are automatically adjusted so th at they fill as much of the screen as possible (if the aspect ratio of the picture is different to your TV screen you may n otice black bars at the sides, or at the top and bottom of the screen). While the slideshow is running: Note ⢠The time it takes for the player to load a file increases with large file sizes. Browsing DVD or Video CD disc with the Disc Navigator Use the Disc Navigator to browse thro ugh the contents of a DVD-Video, VR mode DVD-R/-RW or Video CD disc to find the pa rt you want to play. Important ⢠You canâÂÂt use th e Disc Naviga tor with Video CDs in PB C mode. 1 During playback, press HOME MENU and select âÂÂDisc Navi gatorâ from the on- screen menu. 2 Select a view option. The options available depend on the kind of disc loa ded and whether the disc is playin g or not, but include: ⢠Title â Titles from a DVD-Video di sc. ⢠Chapter â Chapters from the current title of a DVD-Video disc. ⢠Track â Tracks fro m a Video CD disc. ⢠Time â Thu mbnails f rom a Video CD disc at 10 minute intervals. ⢠Original: Title â O riginal ti tles from a VR mode DVD-R/-RW disc. ⢠Play List: Ti tle â Play List titles from a VR mode DVD-R/-RW disc. ⢠Original: Time â Thumbnails from the Original content at 10 minute intervals. ⢠Play List: Ti me â Thu mbnails f rom the Play List at 10 minute intervals. Button What it does ïÂÂ¥ P auses the slideshow ; press again to restart. ï¯ Displays the previous picture. ï° Display s the next pict ure. ï«/ï¬ P auses the slides how and rotates the displayed picture 90ú (counter) clockwise. (P ress ï¤ (play) to restart slideshow .) ï©/ïª P auses the slideshow and flips the displayed picture horizontally or vertically . (P ress ï¤ (play) to restart slideshow .) ZOOM P auses the slideshow and zooms the picture. P ress again to toggle between 1x, 2x and 4x zoom. (P ress ï¤ (play) to restart slideshow .) MENU Displays the Disc Navigator screen (see below). Disc Navigator Di sc Navigator Title Chapter DV48AV_EN.bo ok 28 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 29 En The screen shows up to six moving thumbnail images displa yed one after an other. To displa y the previous/next six thumbnails, press ï¯ / ï° (you donâÂÂt h ave to wait for all the thumbna ils to finis h playing to display t he previous/ne xt page). 3 Sele ct the thum bnai l image for what you want to pl ay. You can use either the cursor bu ttons ( ï©/ïª/ ï«/ï¬ ) and ENTER to select a thumbnail, or the numbe r buttons. To select us ing the number bu ttons, enter a two-digit number then press ENTER . Tip ⢠Another way to find a particular place on a disc is to use one of the search m odes. See Searching a disc on page 33. Browsing WMA, MP3, MPEG-4 AAC, DivX video, WMV and JPEG files with the Disc Navigator Use the Disc Navi gator to find a particular file or folder by filename. Note that if there a re other types of files on the same disc, these will not be displayed in the Disc Navigator. 1 Press HOME MENU and s elect âÂÂDisc Navigatorâ from the on-screen menu. 2 Use the cursor butt ons ( ï©/ïª/ï«/ï¬ ) and EN TER to n avigate . Use the cursor up/down buttons ( ï©/ïª ) to move up and down th e folder/fil e list. Use the cursor left button ( ï« ) to return to the parent f older. Use ENTER or cursor right ( ï¬ ) t o open a highlighted folder. ⢠You can also return to the parent folder by going t o the top of th e list to the â .. â folder, then pressing ENTER . ⢠When a JPEG file is hi ghlighted, a thumbnail image is displayed on the right. 3 To pla y the highli ghted track or DivX video/ WMV file or disp lay the high lighted JPEG file, press ENTER. ⢠When a MP3/WMA/MPEG-4 A AC or DivX video/WMV file i s selected, playback begins, starting with the selected f ile, and continues until the end o f the folder. ⢠When a JPEG fi le is selected, a slideshow begins, s tarting wi th that file, a nd continues to the end of the folder. 0 1 04 02 05 03 0 6 Di sc Navigator: Title 0 1 - 49: - - 00:00 / 00:00 0k bp s Fol der 1 Fol der2 Fol der3 Fol der4 File 1 File2 File3 File4 File5 Fol der 2 00:00 / 00:00 0k bp s DV48AV_EN.bo ok 29 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 30 En Tip ⢠You can also play a JPEG slideshow while listening to MP3/WMA/M PEG-4 AAC playback. S imply selec t the audio file yo u w a n t t o l i s t e n t o f o l l o w e d b y t h e J P E G f r o m which you want the slideshow to start. Playback of both the slideshow and the audio files rep eats. Pl ayback co ntrols are effective for the JPEG slideshow only. ⢠To play the contents of the whole disc rather than just the current folder, exit the Disc Navi gator an d start p layback us ing the ï¤ (pla y) button . Looping a section of a disc The A-B Repeat function allows you to specify two p oints (A and B) with in a tr ack (CD , Vide o CD) or title (DVD-Vid eo and DVD-RW) that form a loop which is pla yed over and over. ⢠You canâÂÂt use A-B Repeat with DVD-Audio, SACD, Video CDs i n PBC mode, or M P3/ WMA/MPEG-4 AAC/DivX video/WMV files. 1 During pl ayback, press PLAY MODE and select â A-B Repeatâ from the li st of functions on the left. 2 Press ENTER on âÂÂA(Start Point)â to set the loop start point. 3 Press ENTER on âÂÂB(End Point)â to set the loop end po int. After pressing ENTER , playback jumps back to the start point and plays the loop. 4 To resume no rmal pl ayback, select âÂÂOffâ from the menu. Using repeat play There are various repeat play optio ns, d ep e n d i n g o n t h e ki n d o f d i s c l oa d e d . It â s a ls o possibl e to use repea t play toge ther with program p lay to repeat the tracks/c hapters in the program list (see Creati ng a program list on page 32). Important ⢠Yo u canâÂÂt use Re peat play with Video CDs in PBC mode, or with M P3/WMA/MPEG-4 AAC discs. ⢠You canâÂÂt use repeat and ra ndom play at the same time. 1 During playback, press PLAY MODE and select â Repeatâ from the list o f functions on the left. 2 Select a repeat play option. If program pl ay is active, select Pro gram Repeat to repeat the program list, or Repeat Off to cancel. The repeat options ava ilable depend on the kind of disc loaded. For example, for DVD- Video and DVD-RW discs, you can select Title Repeat or Chapter Repeat (or Repeat Off ). ⢠For DVD-Audio discs, select Group Repeat or Track Repeat (or Repeat O ff ). ⢠For SACDs,CDs and Video CDs, select Disc Repeat or Track Repeat (or Repeat Off ). A(Start Point) B(End Point) Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Title Repeat Chapter Repeat Repeat Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Title Repeat Chapter Repeat Repeat Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode DV48AV_EN.bo ok 30 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 31 En ⢠For DivX video/WMV discs, select Title Repeat , and for some DivX media files, select Chapter Rep eat (or Repeat Off ). Using random play Use the random play func tion to play titles or chapters (DVD-Video), Gr oups (DVD-Audio), or tracks (DVD-Aud io, SACD, CD, Video CD) at random. (N ote that the s ame track /title/ chapter may play more than onc e.) You can set the random play option when a disc is playing or sto pped. Important ⢠Random play remains in effect until you select Random Off from the r andom play menu opti ons. ⢠You canâÂÂt use random play with VR format DVD-R/-RW discs, Video CDs playing in PBC mode, MP3/WMA / MPEG-4 AAC discs, DivX video/W MV discs, or while a DVD disc menu is being displayed. ⢠You canâÂÂt use random play to gether with program or repeat p lay. 1 Press PLAY MODE and select âÂÂRandomâ from the list of functions on the left. 2 Select a ra ndom play op tion. The random p lay options a vailable de pend on the kind of disc loaded. For example, for DVD- Video discs, you can select Random Title or Random Chapter (or Random Off ). ⢠For DVD-Audio discs, select Random Group or Ra ndom Track , (or Random Off ). ⢠For CDs, SACDs and Vid eo CDs, select On or Off to switch random play on or off. Tip ⢠Use the following controls during rando m play: Random Title Random Chapter Random Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Button What it does ï° Selects a new track/title/chapter at random. ï¯ Returns to the beginning of the current track/title/chapter; further presses select another random track/title/chapter. Random Title Random Chapter Random Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode DV48AV_EN.bo ok 31 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 32 En Creating a program list This feature lets you prog ram the play order of titles/ch apters/groups /tracks on a d isc. Important ⢠Yo u canâÂÂt use Program p lay with VR format DVD-R/-RW discs, Video CDs playing in PBC mode, MP3/WMA / MPEG-4 AAC discs, DivX video/W MV discs, or while a DVD disc menu is being displayed. 1 Press PLAY MODE and sel ect âÂÂProgramâ from the list of functions on the left. 2 Select âÂÂCreate /Editâ from the list of program optio ns. 3 Use the cursor buttons and ENTER to select a title, chap ter or track for the current step in the program list. For a DVD-Video disc, you can add a title or a chapter to the program list. ⢠For a DVD-Audio disc, you can add a whole group, or a track within a group to the program list. ⢠For a CD, SACD or V ideo CD, select a tra ck to add to the program list. After pressing ENTER to selec t the title/ chapter/group/track, the step number automatically moves down o ne. 4 Rep eat step 3 to bu ild up a program list. A program list can c ontain up to 24 titles/ chapters/tracks. ⢠You can insert steps into the middle of a program list by just highlig hting the position where you wa nt the new step to appear and enter ing a title/ch apter/group / track number. ⢠To delete a step , highlight it and pres s CLEAR . 5 To play the program list, pres s ï¤ (play). Program play remains ac tive until you turn off program play (see below), erase th e program list (see below), eject the disc or switch off the player. Tip ⢠Use the follow ing controls d uring progr am play: Other functions available from the program menu There are a number of other options in the program menu in addi tion to Create/Edit. ⢠Playbac k Start â Starts playback of a saved program list ⢠Playbac k Stop â Turns of f program play, but does not era se the program list ⢠Program Delete â Erase s the program list and turns off pro gram play Create/Edit Playback Start Playback Stop Program Delete A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Program Step 01. 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. Title 1~38 Title 01 Title 02 Title 03 Title 04 Title 05 Title 06 Title 07 Title 08 Chapter 1~004 Chapter 001 Chapter 002 Chapter 003 Chapter 004 Program Button What it does PLAY MODE Save the program list and exit the program edit screen without starting playback ( HOME MENU does the same). ï° Skip to the next step in the program list. DV48AV_EN.bo ok 32 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 33 En Searching a disc You can sear ch DVD-Vide o di scs by title or chapter number, or by time; DVD-Audio discs can be searched by group or track number; SACDs by track number, CDs and Video CDs by track number or time; DivX video /WMV discs by time, and some DivX media files by chapter numb er. Important ⢠Search functions are not a vailable with Video CDs in P BC mode, or with M P3/ WMA/MPEG-4 AAC discs. 1 Press PLAY MODE and select âÂÂSearch Modeâ fro m the list of functions on the left. 2 Select a search mode . The search options ava ilable depend on the kind of disc loaded. ⢠The disc must be playing in order to use time search. 3 Use the num ber buttons to enter a title, chapter or track nu mber, or a time. ⢠For a time search, enter the numbe r of minutes and seconds into the currently playing title (DVD/ DivX video/WM V) or track (CD/Video CD) you wa nt playback to resume from. For example, press 4 , 5 , 0 , 0 to have playback start from 45 minutes into the disc. For 1 hour, 20 min utes and 30 seconds, press 8 , 0 , 3 , 0 . ⢠Some DVD-Audio discs feature pages of browsable pictures. Enter the page number you want. 4 Press ENTER to start playback. Switching subtitles Some DVD-Video and DivX video discs have subtitle s in one o r more languag es; the dis c box will usuall y tell you which subtitle language s are availab le. You can swi tch subtitle language d uring playba ck. 1 Press SUBTITLE repeatedly to sel ect a subtitle op tion. Note ⢠Some discs only allow you to change subtitle language from the disc menu. Press TOP MENU or MENU to access. ⢠To set subtitle preferences, see Subtitle Language on page 41. ⢠See Display ing external subtitle files on page 10 for mor e on DivX subtitles. 0 0 1 Title Search Chapter Search Time Search Input Chapter A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Subtitle English 1/2 Current / T otal DV48AV_EN.bo ok 33 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 34 En Switching audio language/ channels When playing a DVD-Video and DivX video disc recorded with dialog in two or more languages, you can switc h audio language during pla yback. When playing a VR forma t DVD-R/-RW disc recorded with dual-mono audio, you can switch between the main, su b, and mixed channels during pl ayback. When playing a DVD-Audio disc, you may be able to s witch channe lsâÂÂsee the disc bo x for details. (W hen you change the audio channel, playback restarts from the beginning of the current track.) When playing a Video CD, you can switc h between stereo, just the left channel or just the right channel. 1 Press AUD IO repeatedly to select an audio lang uage/channel option. The languag e/channel inform ation is sho wn on-screen. Note ⢠Some DVD discs only all ow you to change audio language from the disc menu. Press TOP MENU or MENU to access. ⢠To set DVD audio language preferences, see Language settings on page 41. Zooming the screen Using the zoom feature yo u can magnify a part of the screen by a fa ctor of 2 or 4, while watching a DVD, Di vX video/WMV title or Vi deo CD or playi ng a JPEG disc. 1 During playback, us e the ZOOM button to select th e zoom factor ( Normal, 2x or 4x). ⢠Since DVD, Video CD, DivX video/W MV title and JPEG pict ures have a fixed resolution, picture quality wil l deteriorate, especially at 4x zoom. This is no t a malfunction. 2 Use the cursor butt ons to change the zoomed area. You can change the zoom f actor and the zoomed area freely during playback. ⢠If the navigation square at the to p of the screen disappears, press ZOOM again to display it. Switching camera angles Some DVD discs feature scenes shot from two or more angles â check the disc box fo r details. When a multi-angle scene is playing, a icon appears on scre en to let you know that other angles ar e available (this can be switched off if you prefer â see Displa y settings on page 41). ⢠During playback, press ANGLE to switch angle. Displaying disc information Various track, chap ter and title inform ation, such as the elapsed and remaining playing time can be disp layed on-screen while a disc is playing. ⢠To show/switch/hide the information displayed, press DISPL AY repeatedly. ⢠When a disc is p laying, the information appears at the top of the screen. Keep pressing DISPLAY to change the displayed information . DV48AV_EN.bo ok 34 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
USB playback 06 35 En Chapter 6 USB playback Using the USB inter face It is possible to listen to two-channel audio and watch JPEG files using the USB interface on the front of th is unit. Connect a US B mass storage device as shown below. Note ⢠This includes playback of MP3/WMA/ MPEG-4 AAC/JPEG files (except files wi th copy-protection or restricted playback). ⢠Compatible USB devices include portable flash memory (particularly keydrives) a nd digital audio players ( MP3 players) of format FAT16/32. It is not possible to connect th is unit to a personal compu ter for USB playback. ⢠Pioneer c annot guarantee compatib ility (operation and/or bus power) with all USB mass storage devices and assumes no responsibility for any l oss of data that may occur when co nnected to this unit. ⢠With large amo unts of data , it may take longer for the system to read the contents of a USB device. ⢠The Home Menu cannot be displayed while using the USB mode. 1 With the p layer switched on , press DVD/USB. Ma ke s ur e y ou r TV i s o n an d s e t t o t h e c or r ec t video input, and that USB MODE is showing on the fro nt panel di splay. 2 Connect you r USB device. The USB terminal i s located on the fron t panel. ⢠Disc Navigator is automatically displayed. 3 Press ENTER to start playback. ⢠T h e m e t h o d o f p l a y b a c k f o r f i l e s s a v e d o n a USB device is the same a s for other discs. For more information, see Basic playback cont rols on page 23 and Playing discs on page 27. 4 Turn off this player and re move the USB device. ⢠The next time you turn this player on it will start up in USB mode. To return to DVD mode, either press DVD/USB or press ï¨ OPEN/CLOSE to open the disc tra y. Important If a USB ERR message lights in the display, it may mean that the power requirem ents of the USB device are too high fo r this player, or that the device is incompat ible. Try the following: ⢠Switch the player off, then on again. ⢠Rec onnecting the USB device with the player switched off. ⢠Change the player back to DVD mode ( LOADING will appear in the front p anel display whether a disc is inserted or not) by pressing DVD/USB , th en once again select USB mode ( USB MODE will appear in the fro nt panel di splay). ⢠Using a dedica ted AC adapter (supplied with the device) for USB power. If this doesnâÂÂt remedy the problem, it is l ikely your USB devic e is incompat ible. ïµï STANDBY/ON USB DVD/USB HDMI ï¯ï° USB mass sto rage device USB (Type A) DV48AV_EN.bo ok 35 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Audio Settings and Video Adjust menus 07 36 En Chapter 7 Audio Settings and Video Adjust menus Audio Settings menu The Audio Settings menu o ffers features for adjusting the way discs sound. 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂAudio Settingsâ from the on-scre en display. 2 Select and change settin gs using the ï©/ ïª/ï«/ï¬ (cursor) buttons, and E NTER. Audio DRC â¢S e t t i n g s : High , Medium , Lo w , Off (default) When watching Dolby Digital DVDs at low volume, itâÂÂs easy to lose the quiet er sounds complete ly â includ ing some of th e dialog. Switching Audio DRC (Dynamic Range Control) to on can help by bringing up the quieter sounds, while control ling loud peaks. How much of a differen ce you hear depends on the material youâÂÂre listening to. If the material doesnâÂÂt have wide va riations in volume, you may not notice much change. Note ⢠Audio DRC is only effective with Dolby Digital audio sources. ⢠Audio DRC is only effective through the digital output when Dig ital Ou t is set to On , and Dolby Digital Out is set to Dolby Digital > PCM (see Digital Au dio Out settings on page 39). ⢠The effect of Audio DRC also depends on your speakers and A V receiver settings. Virtual Surround ⢠Settings: On , Off (default) Switch on Virtual Surro und to enjoy real istic surround soun d effects from just t wo speakers. Tip ⢠You can also use the SURROUND bu tton on the remote control to switch Virtual Surround on. Note ⢠96 kHz linear PCM audio is automati cally downsample d to 48 kHz if Virtual Surround is switched on. â¢T h e Audi o Output M ode (see page 4 5) must be set to 2 Chann el in order to be able to use Virtual Surr ound. ⢠If the player is outp utti ng Dolby Digital, DTS or MPEG bitstream audio (in other words, no conversion to PCM), Virtua l Surround has n o effect on the audio from the digital output. See Digital Audio Out settings on page 39 for how to set up the digital output formats. Audio Settings Audio Settings Virtual Surround Audio DRC Dialog On Off DV48AV_EN.bo ok 36 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Audio Settings and Video Adjust menus 07 37 En ⢠How good the surround effect is varies with the disc. Note ⢠96 kHz linear PCM audio is automatically downsampled to 48 kHz if the Equalizer is switched on. Dialog â¢S e t t i n g s : High , Medium , Lo w , Off (default) The Dialog feature is designed to make the dialog stand out f rom other background sounds in the soundtracks. Video Adjust menu From the Video Adjust scre en you can adjust various settings that affect how the picture is presented. 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂVideo Adjustâ from the on -screen display. 2 Make settings using the ï©/ïª/ï«/ï¬ (cursor) button s, and EN TER. You can ad just the f ollowing pi cture quality settings: ⢠Sharpness â Adjusts the sharpness of edges in the picture ( Fine , Standa rd (default) , Soft ). ⢠Brightness â Adjusts the ove rall brightness ( âÂÂ20 to 20 ). ⢠Contrast â Adjusts t he contrast between light and dark ( âÂÂ16 to 16 ). ⢠Gamma â Adjusts the âÂÂwarmthâ of th e picture ( High , Me dium , Low , Off (default) ). ⢠Hue â Ad justs the red/green balance ( green 9 to red 9 ). ⢠Chroma L evel â Adjusts how saturated colors appear ( âÂÂ9 to 9 ). ⢠BNR â Switche s on/off block nois e reduction ( On , Off (default) ). Adjust t he Brightness , Contra st, Hue and Chroma Level s ettings using the ï«/ï¬ (cursor left/right) buttons. 3 Press ENTER to return to the Video Adjust screen, or HOME MENU to exit. Video Adjust Sharpness Brightness Contrast Gamma Hue Chroma Level BNR Standard 0 0 Off 0 0 Off ï¤ ï¤ ï¤ ï¤ ï¤ ï¤ ï¤ Video Adjust Brightne ss min max 0 DV48AV_EN.bo ok 37 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 08 38 En Chapter 8 Initial Settings menu Using the Initial Settings menu The Initial Settings menu p rovides audio and video output settings, parental lock settings, and display settings, among others. If an option is gray ed out it means that it cannot be changed at the current time. This is usually bec ause a disc is playing. S top the disc, then change the setting. 1P r e s s HOME MEN U and select âÂÂInit ial SettingsâÂÂ. 2 Use the cursor buttons and ENTER to select the setting and option you wan t to set. All the settings and options are explained on the following pages. Note ⢠In the table bel ow, the default setting is shown in bold : other se ttings are shown in italic s . â¢T h e Digital Audio Out settings only need to be set if you have connected the digital output of th is player to an AV receiver, or other equipment. ⢠Check the op erating ins tructions su pplied with your other equipme nt to see which digital aud io formats itâÂÂs comp atible with. ⢠Some setti ngs, such as TV Screen , Audio Language and Subtitle Language may be overridden by the DVD disc. Often th ese settings can also be made from the DVD disc menu. â¢T h e HDMI Out , HDMI Resolution and HDMI Color settings only need to be set if you connected this player to an HDM I- compatible co mponent using the HDMI connector. â¢T h e Digital Audio Out , Compon ent Out , SACD Playback an d Speakers settings cannot be set if the player is con nected to an HDMI-compa tible component usin g the HDMI connector. Additionally, certa in settings such as HDMI Out , HDMI Resolution , and HDMI Color may be changed automatically. Initial Settings DV48AV_EN.bo ok 38 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 08 39 En Digital Audio Out settings Setting Option What it means Digital Out On Digital audio is output from the digital outputs. Note that there is no digital output when pl aying SACDs and some DVD-Audio discs rega rdless of this setting. Off No digital audio output. Dolby Digital Out Dolb y Digital Dolby Digital encoded digital au dio is output when playing a Dolby Digital DVD disc. Dolby Digital > PCM Dolby Digital audio is converte d to PCM a udio before being output. DTS Out DTS DTS encoded digital audio is ou tput when playing a DTS disc. (Noise will be output if your amplifier/receiver is not compatible with DTS audio.) DTS > PC M No digital audio is output when playing a DTS disc.DTS audio is converte d to PCM au dio befor e being out put. Linear PCM Out Down Sample On 96 kHz digital audio is converted to 48 kHz for digital output. Note that High sampling rate DVD-Audio discs (192 kHz or 176.4 kHz) a utomatically output down- sampled audio th rough the digital output s. Down Sample Off 96 kHz digital audio is output as is at 96 kHz. MPEG Out MPEG > PCM MPEG encoded digital audio is converted to PCM audio for digital output. MPEG MPEG encoded digital audio is output as is. HDMI Out LPCM (2CH) Set if your monitor or device on ly accepts st ereo input. On this setting multichannel audio is downmixed to 2 channels for stereo linear PCM output. LPCM (5.1CH) Set if the monitor or devi ce you have connected using H DMI is compatible with Liner PCM multi-channel formats. A ll audio signals are output as linear PC M 5.1 format. (Use this setting if you want to deco de all streams by a player) Auto Dolby Digital, DTS and MP EG sources are processed according to how they were encoded, and linear PCM sources are heard as is. SACD sources are output as linear PCM. Auto (DSD) Set if you want to output DSD audio from an SACD source. Off No digital audio output. Choose this option when you want to change the Digital A udio Out , SACD Playback and Speakers settings. DV48AV_EN.bo ok 39 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 08 40 En Video Output settings Setting Option What it means TV Screen (This setting effective for analog and HDMI video output. See also Sc reen sizes and disc formats on page 52.) 4:3 (Letter Box) Set if you have a conventional 4:3 TV. Widesc reen movies are shown with black bars top and bottom. 4:3 (Pan & Scan) Set if you have a conventional 4:3 TV. Widesc reen movies are shown with the sides cropped so that the image fills the screen. 16:9 (Wide) Set if you have a widescreen TV. 16:9 (Compresse d) Can be selected when you are connected via HDMI, and have the HDMI Resolution set to 1920 x 1080p , 1920 x ã 1080i or 1280 x 720p . Video in 4:3 can be properly displayed on a 16:9 high definiti on television (wit h black bars shown on either side of the screen). Component Out Progr essive Set if your TV is comp atible with progressive scan video (see your TVâÂÂs instruction ma nual for details). Th e PRGSVE indicator lights in the front panel display. See also Switching the video o utput to interlace usi ng the front panel controls on page 13. Note that progre ssive scan video is only outp ut from the compone nt vide o jacks. Interlace Set if your TV is not compatib le with progressive scan video. HDMI Resolution 1920x1080p Set if your TV supports 1 920 x 1080 pixel progressive- scan video. 24 Hz frame rate is not supported. 1920x1080i Set if your TV supports 1920 x 1080 pi xel interlace video. 1280x720p Set if your TV supports 1280 x 720 pixel progressive-scan video. 720x480p Set if your TV supports 7 20 x 480 pixel progr essive-scan video. 720x480i Set if your TV supports 720 x 480 pixel interlace video. HDMI Color Full r ange RGB If colors are weak, this give s brighter colors and deeper black. RGB Use this setting if colors appe ar overly rich on the Full Range RGB setting. Component Outputs component video format (default setting for HDMI- compatible devices). DV48AV_EN.bo ok 40 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 08 41 En Language settings Display settings Setting Option What it means Audio L anguage English If there is an English soundtrack on the disc then it will be played. Languages as displayed If there is the language selected on the disc, then it will be played. Other Language Select to choose a language other than the ones displayed (see page 53). Subtitle Language (See also Displaying externa l subtit le files on page 10 .) English If there are English subtitles on the disc then they will be displayed. Languages as displayed If there is the subtitle language selected on the disc, then it will be displayed. Other Language Select to choose a language other than the ones displayed (see page 53). DVD Menu Lang. w/Subtitle Lang. DVD disc menus will be displayed in the same language as your selected subtitle language, if possible. Languages as displayed DVD disc menus will be displayed in the selected language, if possible. Other Language Select to choose a language other than the ones displayed (see page 53). Subtitle Display On Subtitles are displayed according to your selected subtitle language (see above). Off Subtitles are always off by defa ult when you play a DVD disc (note that some discs override this setting). Setting Option What it means OSD Languag e English On-screen displays of th e pla yer are in English. Languages as displayed On-screen displays are shown in the language selected. Angle Indicato r On A camera icon is displaye d on-screen during multi-angle scenes on a DVD di sc. Off No multi-angle indication is shown. DV48AV_EN.bo ok 41 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 08 42 En Options settings Parental Lock ⢠Default level: Off ; Default password: none ; Default Country/Area code: us (2119) To give you some co ntrol over what your children watch on your DVD player, some DVD-Video discs feature a Parental Lock level. If your player is set to a lowe r level than the disc, the disc wonâÂÂt play. Some discs also support the Countr y/Area Code feature. The player does not play certa in scenes on these discs, depending on the Country/Area Code you set. Note ⢠Not all discs use Parental Lock, and will play without requiring the password first. ⢠If you forget your password, youâÂÂll need to reset the player to register a new password (see Resetting the player on page 53). Registering a new password You must register a pa ssword before you can change the Parenta l Lock level or enter a Country code. 1 Select âÂÂOption sâÂÂ, then âÂÂPasswordâ . 2 Use the nu mber bu ttons to enter a 4-digit passwo rd. The numbers you enter show up as asterisks (*) on-screen. 3 Press ENTER to register the password. You will return to the Options menu screen. Setting Option What it means Parental Lock â See Parent al Lock below. DVD Playback Mode DVD-Audio All material on a DVD-Audio disc is playable. DVD-Video Only the DVD-Video part of a DVD-Audio disc is playable. SACD Playback 2ch Area Select s the 2 cha nnel (strer eo) SACD a udio area of the dis c for playback. Multi-ch Area Selects the multi-channel SACD audio area of the disc for playback. CD Area Selects the standard CD audio area of an SACD/CD hybrid disc for playback. DTS Downmix STEREO Downmixes DTS for 2 cha nnel output to regular stereo. (See also DTS Downmix on page 43.) Lt/Rt Downmixes DTS for 2 channel output to be compatible with Dolby Surround matrix decoders. (See also DTS Downmix on page 43.) DivX VOD Displ ay See About DivXî VOD content on page 44. Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers Parental Loc k DVD Pla yback Mode SACD Pla yback DTS Downmix DivX V OD Passwo rd Level Change Country Code Initial Settings DV48AV_EN.bo ok 42 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 08 43 En Changing your password To change your password, confirm your existing password then enter a new one. 1 Select â Password Changeâ . 2 Use the number butto ns to enter your existing passwo rd, then press ENTER . 3 Enter a new password and pr ess ENTER . This registers the new password and you will return to the Options me nu screen. Setting/changing the Parental Lock 1 Select â Level Changeâ . 2 Use number buttons to enter your password, then press ENTER . 3 Select a ne w level and press ENTER . ⢠Press ï« (cursor left) repeatedly to lock more levels (more discs will requir e the password); press ï¬ (cursor right) to unlock levels. You canâÂÂt lo ck level 1. This sets the new level and you will return to the Options menu screen. Setting/changing the Country/Area code You can f ind the Country/Area code li st on page 61. 1 Select â Country CodeâÂÂ. 2 Use number buttons to enter your password, then press ENTER . 3 Select a Co untry/Area code and press ENTER . There are two ways yo u can do this: ⢠Sel ect by code letter: Use ï©/ïª (cursor up/ down) to change the Country/Area code. ⢠Select by code number: Press ï¬ (cursor right) then use the number butto ns to enter the 4-digit Country/Area code. The new Country/Area code is set and you wil l return to th e Options menu s creen. Note that the new Country/Area code doesnâÂÂt take effect until the next disc is lo aded (or the current disc is reloaded). DTS Downmix ⢠Default setting: STEREO If youâÂÂve selected DTS > PCM in DTS Out on page 39 or 2 Channel in Audio Output Mode on page 45, you can cho ose the way the signal is downmixed to PCM audio. STEREO will downmix the DTS signal to 2-channel stereo, whereas Lt/Rt will downmix to a 2-channel signal compatibl e with Dolby surroun d matrix decoders. (This allows you to hear surround sound if your AV receiver o r amplifier has Dolby Pro Log ic capability.) Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers STEREO Lt/Rt Initial Settings Parental Loc k DVD Pla yback Mode SACD Pla yback DTS Downmix DivX V OD DV48AV_EN.bo ok 43 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 08 44 En About DivX î VOD content In order to play DivX VOD (video on demand) content on this player, you first need to register the player with your DivX VO D content provider. You do this by generating a DivX VOD registration code, which you submit to you r provider. Important ⢠DivX VOD content is protected by a DRM (Digital Right s Management ) system. This restricts playback of content to specific, registered devices. ⢠If you load a di sc that cont ains Div X VOD content not authorized for your play er, the message Authorization Error is displayed and the c ontent wi ll not play. ⢠Resetting the player (as described in Resetting the player on page 53) will not cause you to lose your registration code. Displaying your DivX VOD registration code 1P r e s s HOME MENU and se lect âÂÂInitial SettingsâÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂOption sâÂÂ, then âÂÂD ivX VODâÂÂ. 3 Sele ct âÂÂDispla yâÂÂ. Your 8-digit registrat ion code is displayed. Make a note of the code as you will need it when you register with a DivX VOD provider. Playing DivX î VOD content Some DivX VOD con tent may only be playable a fixed number of times. When you load a disc containing this type of DivX VOD content, the remaining num ber of plays is shown o n- screen and you then have the option of pla ying the disc (thereby using up one of the remaining plays), or stopping. If you load a disc that contains expired DivX VOD content (for example, content that has zero re maining plays), the message Rental Expired is displayed. If your DivX VOD content allo ws an unlimited number of plays, th en you may load the disc into your player and play the content as often as you lik e, and no messag e will be displayed. Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers Parental Loc k DVD Pla yback Mode SACD Pla yback DTS Downmix DivX V OD Display Initial Settings Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers Initial Settings DivX (R) Video On Demand 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Y our registration code is: T o learn more visit www.divx.com/vod Done DV48AV_EN.bo ok 44 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 08 45 En Speakers settings Audio Output Mode ⢠Default s etting: 2 Channel If you connected this player to you r amplifier using the 5.1 chan nel analog outputs (front, surround, center and subwoofer outs), set this to 5.1 Channel ; if yo u connected only the stereo outs, set to 2 Channel . Note ⢠Even if you set Audio Output M ode to 5.1 Channel , youâÂÂll only get sound from all speakers when playing a 5.1 ch annel multi-channel disc. ⢠When set to 5.1 Channe l , only the front left/ right chan nels are outp ut from the AUDIO OUT (2ch) jacks. Chan ge to 2 Channel if you want to listen to downmixed stereo audio (for example, because y ou are listening through the TVâÂÂs built- in speakers). ⢠When set to 5.1 Channel there is no digital output when playing DVD-Audio. â¢I f y o u s e t t o 2 Channel , Dolby Di gital, DTS and MPEG audio is mixed down to two channels s o you still hea r all the audio recorded on the disc. W ith DTS encoded audio, you can choose ho w the signal is downmixed to PCM audio. See DTS Downm ix on page 43 to change the downmix setting. ⢠Some DVD-Audio di scs donâÂÂt allow down- mixing of audio. These discs always output multi-channel audi o regardless of the setting made here. Setting Option What it means Audio Output Mode 2 Channel The player outputs analog audio in stereo only. See also Audio Output Mode below. 5.1 Channel The pl ayer out puts 5.1 c hannel an alog aud io. See al so Audio Output Mode below. Speaker Distance â Specify the distance of your speakers from your listening position. See also Speaker Distance on page 49. Speaker Installation â Specify the number and size of speakers in your system. Se e also Speaker Installation on page 50. Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers Audio Output Mode Speaker Distance Speaker Installation 2 Channel 5.1 Channel Initial Settings DV48AV_EN.bo ok 45 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 08 46 En About the audio output settings The table b elow sho ws how the a udio settin gs you make i n the Initia l Setting s menu (see page 38) affect the output from the 2 channel an d the 5.1 cha nnel analog outputs, an d from the digital outputs with va rious types of disc. * 1 When Aud io Output Mode is set to 2 Channel , the AUDIO OUT (5.1ch) FRONT L / R jacks act as a second pair of stereo audio outputs. * 2 Dolby Digital > PCM , MPEG > PCM or DTS > PCM setting (pa ge 39) * 3 Dolby Digital , MPEG or DTS setting (page 39) * 4 Discs that prohibit down m ixing will be output as 5.1 channel even if 2 Channel is selected as the Audio Output Mode setting (see page 45). * 5 Discs that prohibit downmixing also mute the digital output. * 6 When Audio Output Mode is set to 5.1 Channel , mono sources are heard from the center speaker onl y. Di sc au dio format Player setting Front L / R â â â â â â â â â â â âÂÂâ S urround L/R, Center , SW S urround L/R, Center , SW S urround L/R, Center , SW S urround L/R, Center , SW S urround L/R, Center , SW S urround L/R, Center , SW â Front L / R Front L / R Front L / R Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right * 6 Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right 2 ch downmix 2 ch downmix 2 c h downmix *4 2 ch downmix *5 2 ch downmix *5 2 ch downmix 2 ch downmix Front L / R 2 c h downmix Front L / R 2 c h downmix 2 Ch 5. 1 Ch 2 Ch 5. 1 Ch Front L/R analog output s * 1 S urroun d L/R Center , S W , output s * 1 Digital output s PCM convert *2 Bit s tream *3 Dol by Digital Dol by Digital karaoke 2 Ch / 5. 1 Ch 2 Ch / 5. 1 Ch 2 Ch / 5. 1 Ch 2 Ch / 5. 1 Ch 2 Ch / 5. 1 Ch Linear PCM 2 Ch 5. 1 Ch DT S MPEG 2 Ch 5. 1 Ch DVD-Au dio 2 Ch 5. 1 Ch S uper Aud io CD 2 Ch 5. 1 Ch DT S CD CD Vi d eo CD DVD-RW (VR mo de) DVD Dol b y Digital â 2 c h downmix DT S DT S Dol b y Digital Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right Dol b y Digital MPEG or PCM MPEG DV48AV_EN.bo ok 46 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 08 47 En About the HDMI audio output settings The table below shows how the audio set tings you make in the HDMI Out (see HDMI Out on page 39) and Audio Outp ut Mode screens ( Audio Output Mode on page 45) affect the HDMI output with various types of disc. * 1 These formats include DVD-RW discs. * 2 If the conn ected componen t is not D VD-Audio (C PPM) compat ible, it is n ot possible to output CPPM copy-controlled DVD-Audio sour ces from the HDMI connection (see HDMI output with DVD-Aud io and SACD sources on page 48 for mor e on this). * 3 If the discs prohibit do wnmixi ng, output Front L/R. * 4 If the HDMI d evice you are using is not compat ible with Mu lti-ch formats, th e output signa l is the same as LPCM (2CH) setti ng. * 5 If the HDMI device you are using is not compat ible with these compresse d formats, the signal is output as linear PC M. * 6 If the connected HDMI device is not compa t ible with p rotected au dio contents (s uch as DVD-Audio or SAC D), SACD audio is not ou tput from the HDMI terminal . * 7 Analog SACD audio is not output wh en you have HDMI Out set to Auto (DSD) . CD 5.1 ch * 4 5.1 ch * 4 5.1 ch (DSD) * 4, 7 Disc audio format DVD-Audio (with CPPM) * 2 DVD-Audio (without CPPM) Linear PCM * 1 MPE G * 1 Dolby Digital (Karaoke) Dolby Digital * 1 DTS CD/MP3/WMA/MPE G -4 AAC Video CD DTS CD LPCM (2CH) LPCM (5.1CH) HDMI Out setting Auto Left / Right 5.1 ch * 4 5.1 ch * 4 5.1 ch * 4 5.1 ch * 4 5.1 ch * 4 5.1 ch * 4 Left / Right Left / Right 5.1 ch * 4 Left / Right MPE G * 5 Dolby Digital * 5 Dolby Digital * 5 DTS * 5 5.1 ch * 4 5.1 ch * 4 Left / Right Left / Right Auto (DSD) Left / Right MPE G * 5 Dolby Digital * 5 Dolby Digital * 5 DTS * 5 DTS * 5 DTS * 5 5.1 ch * 4 5.1 ch * 4 Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right 2 ch downmix 2 ch downmix Left / Right or 2 ch downmix * 3 Left / Right or 2 ch downmix * 3 Left / Right Left / Right Left / Right DVD Super Audio CD * 6 Left/Right DV48AV_EN.bo ok 47 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 08 48 En HDMI output with DVD-Audio and SACD sources The way audio sources are output from the HDMI terminal depends on the specification of the connect ed compo nent. * 1 This unit checks the specifi cation of the connected compo nent (suc h sample rate/multi- channel l imitations a nd compat ibility with p rot ected audio contents) and outp uts the signal accordingly. Note that âÂÂDVD-Audio co mpatibleâ indic ates compat ibility with p rotected aud io contents. âÂÂSACD co mpatibleâ indic ates compatib ility with DSD signal s. * 2 If HDMI Out setting (page 39) is set to LPCM (2 CH) , DVD-Audio multichannel sources will be downmixed to stereo. (In cases where the source is d ownmix-prohi bited, only the front left/right channels are output. ) For SACD sources, the 2 ch annel (stereo) SA CD audio area is selected. If the video output resolutio n is 480i or 480p audi o output m ay be limited to 2 channel (depending to the connected co mponent). * 3 In cases w here the sourc e is downmi x-prohibited , only the fro nt left/right c hannels are o utput. * 4 If CPPM shows in the f ront pan el displa y, it means it is not possibl e to outp ut CPPM c opycon- trolled DVD-Audio sources from the HDMI conn ection. Discs with no CPPM protection are limited to 2 channel out put. Component specification Disc Format (DVD-Audio or SACD) 2 ch DVD-Audio and 5.1 channel compatible on HDMI * 1 DVD-Audio and 2 channel compatible on HDMI * 1 Left/Right or 2 ch downmix * 3 Incompatible with DVD-Audio on HDMI * 1 2 ch 2 ch VSX-84TXSI VSX-82TXS PDP-5080HD PDP-4280HD PDP-5050HD PDP-4350HD 5.1 ch No sound * 4 No sound * 4 5.1 ch * 2 Component/output Example Component SACD, DVD-Audio and 5.1 channel compatible on HDMI * 1 2 ch VSX-91TXH 5.1 ch * 2 No sound Auto (DSD) SACD No sound No sound DSD 2ch/5.1 ch DV48AV_EN.bo ok 48 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 08 49 En Speake r Distance ⢠Defau lt settings: all spea kers 10.0ft You only need to make this setting i f you connected this player to yo ur amplifier using the 5.1 channel analog outp uts. These settings do not affect any digital audio output. To get the best surround so und from your system, you should set up the speake r distances from your listeni ng position. 1U s e t h e ï©/ïª (cursor up/down) to select a speaker. â¢T h e L and R speakers are paired; you canâÂÂt set them differently. 2P r e s s ï¬ (cursor right) to change the speaker di stance for the highlighted speaker. 3U s e t h e ï©/ïª (cursor up /down) to change the distance. ⢠When you change the distance settin gs of the front left ( L ) or front right (R ) speakers, all the other speaker distances c hange relative to it. ⢠Front left/right ( L /R ) speaker distances can be set from 1.0 ft to 30.0 ft in 1.0 ft increments. ⢠The center speaker ( C ) can be set from âÂÂ7.0 ft to 0.0 ft relative to th e front left/right speakers. ⢠Surround left/right ( SL / SR ) speakers can be set from âÂÂ20.0 ft to 0.0 ft relative to the front left/rig ht speakers. ⢠You canâÂÂt set the subwoofer ( SW ) distance. 4 Press ï« (cursor left) to go back to the speaker list if you want to modify another speaker, or press ENTER to exit the Sp eaker Distance screen. Note During playback of SACD and MPEG- audio DVD-Video discs, the effective C , SL and SR speaker distance settings are âÂÂ3.0 ft to 0.0 ft relative to the front le ft/right speakers. Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers Audio Output Mode ï¤ 5.1 Channel Speaker Distance Speaker Installation Initial Settings Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers L C R SR SL 10.0ft 10.0ft 10.0ft 10.0ft 10.0ft Initial Settings DV48AV_EN.bo ok 49 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 08 50 En Speaker Inst allation â¢D e f a u l t s e t t i n g s : L/R: Large | C: Large | SL/ SR: Large | SW: On You only need to make this setting i f you connected this player to yo ur amplifier using the 5.1 channel analog outp uts. This setting does not affect digital audio output. Use the Speaker Installation screen to tell the player what kinds of speakers you have connected. 1U s e t h e ï©/ïª (cursor up/down) butto ns to select a speaker. â¢T h e L and R , and SR and SL speakers are paired; you canâÂÂt set them differently. 2P r e s s ï¬ (cursor right) to modify the selected speaker. 3U s e t h e ï©/ïª (cursor up/down) butto ns to change the current setting. ⢠You can see the effect of your changes in the room graphic on the right of the screen. ⢠Except for the subwoofer, you can set speaker size to Large or Small . If the m ain speaker cone in the speaker is 1 2 cm or more, set to Large , otherwise set to Small (or Off if you donâÂÂt have th at speaker). ⢠If you set the front L and R speakers to Small , the cente r and surround speakers are automa tically set to Smal l and the subwoofer to On . ⢠The subwoofer can only be set to On or Off . 4P r e s s ï« (cursor left) to go back to the speaker list if you want to modify another speaker, or press ENTER to exit the Sp eaker Installation screen. Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers Audio Output Mode ï¤ 5.1 Channel Speaker Distance Speaker Installation Initial Settings Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers L C R SR SL SW Large Large Large Large Large On Initial Settings DV48AV_EN.bo ok 50 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additiona l information 09 51 En Chapter 9 Additional information Taking care of your player and discs General Hold discs by the edge or by the center hole and edge. When youâÂÂre not using a disc, return it to its case and store upright. Avoid leaving di scs in excessively cold, humid, or ho t environments (including under direct sunlight). DonâÂÂt glue paper or put stickers on to discs. Do not use a pencil, ball-point pe n or other sharp- tipped writing instrument to write on the disc. DonâÂÂt use self-adhesive disc labels on d iscs as these can cause the disc to wa rp slightly during playback ca using di stortion i n the picture and/or sound. Damaged and shaped discs Do not use cracked, chip ped, warped, or otherwise damaged discs as they may damage the player. This player is designed to be used only with conventional, fully circu lar discs. Do not use shaped discs. Pioneer disclai ms all liabilit y arising in connectio n with the use of shaped discs. Cleaning discs Fingerprints and dust on di scs can affect playback performance. Clean using a soft, dry cloth, wiping the disc li ghtly from the center to the outside edge as shown below. If necessar y, use a cloth so aked in alco hol, or a commerci ally available CD/D VD cleaning kit to clean a disc more thorough ly. Never use benzine, thinn er or other cleaning agents, including products designed fo r cleaning vinyl record s. Cleaning the unitâÂÂs exterior Unplug the unit be fore cleaning. Use a dry cloth to wipe off dust and dirt. If the surfaces are very dirty, wipe with a soft cloth dipped in some neutral cleanser diluted five or six times with water and wrung out well, then wipe again with a dry cloth. Do not use furnitu re wax or cleaners. Never use thin ners, benzine or in secticide s prays or other chemica ls on or near this unit. If you use a ch emical-i mpregnated cleaning cloth, r ead the instru ctions caref ully before use. These cloths may leave smea r marks on half-mirror finish surfaces; if this happens, finish with a dry clot h. Cleaning the pickup lens The DVD playerâÂÂs lens should not become dirty in normal use, but if for some reason it should malfunction due to dust or dirt, consult your nearest Pioneer-authorize d service center. We do not recommend using commercially available lens cleaners for CD players. DV48AV_EN.bo ok 51 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additiona l information 09 52 En Condensation Condensation may form inside the player if it is brought into a wa rm room from outside, o r if the temperature of the room rises quickly. Although the condensatio n wonâÂÂt damage the player, it may temporarily impair its performance. Leave it to adjust to the warmer temperature fo r about an hour be fore switching on. Moving the play er If you need to move the player, first press ïµ STANDBY/ON on the front panel to turn the player off. Wai t for -OFF- to disappear from the display, then unplug the power cable. Never lift or move the unit during playback â discs rotate at a high speed and may be damaged. Screen sizes and disc f ormats DVD-Video discs come in several different screen aspect ratios, ranging f rom TV programs, which are genera lly 4:3, to CinemaScope widescreen movies, with an aspect ratio of up to about 7:3 . Televisions, too, come in different aspect ratios; âÂÂstandardâ 4:3 and widescreen 16:9. Widescreen TV u sers If you have a widescre en TV, the TV Screen setting (page 40) of this player should be set to 16:9 (Wid e) or 16:9 (C ompressed) . When you watch discs recorded in 4:3 format with the 16:9 (Wide) setting, you can use the TV controls to select ho w the picture is presented. Your TV may offer various zoom and stretch options; see the instructions that came with your TV for details. Please note tha t some movie aspect ratios are wider than 16:9, so even th ough you have a widescreen TV, these discs will stil l play in a âÂÂletter boxâ style with bl ac k bars at the top an d bottom of the screen. Standard TV users If you have a stan dard TV, the TV Screen setting (page 40) of this player should be set to 4:3 (Let ter Box) or 4:3 (Pan&S can) , depending on which you prefer. Set to 4:3 (Letter Box) , widescreen discs are shown with black bars top and bottom. Set to 4:3 (Pan&Scan) , widescreen discs are shown with the left and right sides cropped. Although the pictur e looks larger, you don âÂÂt actually see th e whole picture. Please note that many widescreen discs override the playerâÂÂs setti ngs so that the disc is shown in letter box format rega rdless of the setting. Note â¢U s i n g t h e 16:9 (Wide) or 16: 9 (Compresse d) setting with a standard 4:3 TV, or either of the 4:3 settings with a widescreen TV, will result in a distorted picture. DV48AV_EN.bo ok 52 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additiona l information 09 53 En Resetting the player Use this proce dure to reset all the playerâÂÂs settings to the fac tory defaul t. 1 Switch the player into stand by. 2 Using the front panel buttons, hold down the ï§ (sto p) button and press ïµ STANDBY/ON to switch the player back on. All the playerâÂÂs settings a re now reset. DVD-Video regions All DVD-Video discs car ry a region mark on the case somewhere that indicates which region(s) of the world the di sc is compatible with. Your DVD player also has a region mark, which you can find on the rear pan el. Discs from inco mpatible reg ions will n ot play in this player. In this case the attention sen tence Incompati ble disc region number C anâÂÂt play disc is displayed on screen. Discs marked ALL will play in any playe r. The diagram below shows the various DVD regions of the world. Selecting languages using the language code list Some of th e language options (such as âÂÂD VD Menu Lang.â in the Initial S ettings) allow you to set your preferred language from any o f the 136 languages listed in the language code list on page 61. 1 Select âÂÂOth er LanguageâÂÂ. 2U s e t h e ï«/ï¬ (cursor left/right) buttons to select either a code letter or a code numbe r. 3U s e t h e ï©/ïª (cursor up/down) buttons to select a code letter or a code number. See Language code list on page 61 for a complete list of languages and cod es. 1 2 2 5 5 6 3 2 1 4 4 DV48AV_EN.bo ok 53 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additiona l information 09 54 En Troubleshooting Incorrect operatio n is often mistaken for tro ubl e or malfunction. If you think that there is something wrong with this comp onent, check the points below. Sometimes the trou ble may lie in another co mponent. Inspect th e other componen ts and electrica l appl iances being used. If the trouble cannot be recti fied after checking the items below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or yo ur dealer to carry out repair work. Problem Remedy The disc wonâÂÂt play or is automatically ejected after loading. ⢠Make sure the disc is free from dirt and dust and is not damaged (page 51). ⢠Make sure the disc is loaded with the label side face-up and aligned properly in the disc tray guide. ⢠Incompatible region number: If the region number on a DVD-Video disc does not match the number on th e player, the disc cannot be used (page 53). In this case the attention sentence âÂÂIncompatible disc region number CanâÂÂt play di scâ is displayed on screen. ⢠Condensation inside the player: Allow time for condensation to evaporate. Avoid using the player near an air-conditioning unit. ⢠Disc is loaded upside down: Reload the disc with the label side face up. DVD-Audio playba ck stops. ⢠The disc may h ave been illegally copied. Picture playback stops and the operation buttons cannot be used. ⢠Press ï§ , then start playback again ( ï¤ ). ⢠Press and hold the front panel ïµ STANDBY/ON button for about 10 seconds to switch the unit off, th en press again to switch back on. ⢠Switch the power off once, unplug from the wall socket, then plug back in and s witch on ag ain using the front panel ïµ STANDBY/ON button. New settings made in the Setup screen menu s while a disc is playing are ineffective. ⢠Some settings can be changed whil e a disc is playing, but are not effective until the disc is stopped then restarted: Press ï§ , then start playback again ( ï¤ ). Settings are canceled. ⢠When the power is cut due to po wer failure or by unplugging the power cord, settings will be canceled: Press ïµ STANDBY/ON on the front panel to turn the player off. Wait for -OFF- to disappear from the display, then unplug the power cord. The remote control doesnâÂÂt seem to wo rk. ⢠The remote control is too far from the player, or the angle with the remote sensor is too wide: Use the remote within its operating range (page 19). ⢠The b atter ies are e xhaust ed: Put in new ones (page 7). DV48AV_EN.bo ok 54 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additiona l information 09 55 En No picture/No color. ⢠Incorrect video connections: Check that connection s are correct and that plugs are inserted fully. Also check the video ca ble for damage. ⢠TV/monit or or AV amplifier settin gs are incorrect: Check the instruction manual of the connected equipment. ⢠The video output is set to progre ssive but you r TV/monitor is not compatible with progressive scan: See page 13 for how to set to Interlace . Screen is stretched or aspect does not chan ge. ⢠The TV Screen setting in the Initial Settings menu is incorrect. See page 52 for how to set it correctly for you r TV/monitor. Pict ure dis turbanc e during playback or the picture is dark. ⢠This player is compatible with Macro-Vision Syst em copy guard. Some discs include a copy prevention signal, and when this type of disc is played back, stripes etc., may appear on some sections of the picture depending on the TV. Thi s is not a malfunction. ⢠Due to the playerâÂÂs copy protection circuits, connection of this device through a VCR or an AV selector may prevent recording or cause picture problems. This is not a malfunction. No audio , or audio i s distorted. ⢠No audio is output during slow motion playback or when scanning discs other than audio CDs and SACDs. ⢠Some DVD discs do not output digital audio: Switch your amplifier to the playerâÂÂs analog outputs. ⢠Check that the disc is free from dust and dirt, and that it is not damaged (page 51). ⢠Check that all interconnects are firmly inserted. ⢠Check that the plugs and terminals are free of dirt, oxide, etc. and clean if necessary. Also check the cable for damage. ⢠Make sure the playerâÂÂs output is not connected to the amplifierâÂÂs phono (turntable) inputs. ⢠Check your amplifier/rec eiverâÂÂs settings (volume, input function, speaker settings, etc.). The analog audio is OK, but there appears to be no digital audio s ignal. ⢠Make sure that the Digital Out setting is set to On (page 39). ⢠Check that the Dolby Digital, DTS and MPEG out settings (page 39) are suitable for your amplifier/rece iver â check the instruction manual that came with your amplif ier/receiver . ⢠SACDs and some DVD-Audio discs do not output digital audio. Listen through the player âÂÂs analog audio outputs. Noticeable difference in DVD and CD volum e. ⢠This is due to differences in the audio format and is not a malfunct ion. Problem Remedy DV48AV_EN.bo ok 55 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additiona l information 09 56 En Cannot play multi- channel audio. ⢠Make sure that Audio Output Mode is set to 5.1 Channel (page 45). ⢠Check that the Dolby Digital, DTS and MPEG Out settings (page 39) are suitable for your amplifier/rece iver â check the instruction manual that came with your amplif ier/receiver . ⢠DVD-Audio and SACDs do not outp ut multich annel digital audio. Listen through the play erâÂÂs analog outputs. ⢠Check that the settings in the Speaker Installation screen are correct (page 50). ⢠Check the audio options avai lable from the disc menu. Cannot listen to hig h- sampling rate audio through the digital output. ⢠Make sure that Linear PCM Out is set to Down Sample Off (page 39). ⢠As a copy-protection measure, some DVDs do not output 96kHz audio. In this case, even if set to Down Sample Off , the player automatically outputs the audio at 48 kHz. This is not a malfunction. Cannot outp ut 192 kHz or 176.4 kHz digital audio. ⢠The player does not output digita l audio at these sampling rates. The digital output is automatically downsampled. Cannot outp ut 96 kHz or 88.2 kHz digital audio . ⢠Check that Linear PCM Out is set to Down Sample Off (page 39). ⢠Some discs are digital copy pr otected and do not output high sampling rate digital audio. In this case the output is automatically downsampled. No DTS audio ou tput. ⢠If this unit is connected to a non-D TS compatible amplifier or decoder using a digital audio cable, set DTS Out to DTS > PCM (page 39). If you do no t do this, noise will be output when you play a DTS disc. ⢠If this unit is connected to a DTS-compatible ampli fier or decoder using a digital audio cable, check th e amplifier settings, and that the cable is properly connected. Audio mi x does not sound right or sou nds incomplete (for example, inaudible dialog ). ⢠Make sure that Audio Output Mode is set to 2 C hannel if youâÂÂve connected to the stereo inputs on your amplif ier or TV (page 4 5). CanâÂÂt hear effect of Virtual Surround. ⢠Virtual Surr ound does not work with SACD or DVD-Audio. ⢠The Virtual S urround effect is only output through the AUDIO OUT (2ch) analog audio outputs. ⢠Make sure that Audio Output Mode is set to 2 C hannel (page 45). ⢠The effectiveness of Virtual Surround varies with the disc. Problem Remedy DV48AV_EN.bo ok 56 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additiona l information 09 57 En HDMI troubleshooting Problem Remedy No HDMI audio outp ut. ⢠Check whether or not HDMI Out is set to Off . (See HDMI O ut on page 39.) ⢠This unit has been designed to be compliant with HDMI (High - Definition Mu ltimedia Interf ace). Depend ing on the componen t you have connected, unreliable si gnal transfers may result. ⢠If the front panel HDMI indicator is lit: â Y ou wonâÂÂt hear any sound from the HDMI output if the so urce component is only DVI/HDCP -compatible. ⢠If the front panel HDMI indicator is unlit then: â Make sure that youâÂÂve selected th is player as the HDMI input in the settings for the component youâÂÂre using. Y ou may need to refer to the instruction manual of the component to do this. â Check that the HDMI cable is conn ected properly and that the cable isnâÂÂt damaged. â Check that components connecte d using the HDMI interface are switched on and HDMI compatible. No HDMI vi deo output. ⢠Make sure that youâÂÂve sele cted th is player as the HDMI input in the settings for the component youâÂÂre using. Y ou may need to refer to the instruction manual of the component to do this. ⢠Check that the HDMI cable is conn ected properly and that the cable isnâÂÂt damaged. ⢠Check that components connecte d using the HDMI interface are switched on and HDMI compatible. ⢠This unit has been designed to be compliant with HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Inter face) . Depending on the component you have connected, us ing a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal transfers. ⢠Make sure the resolution on this player matches that of the component you have connected using H DMI. See HDMI Resolution on page 40 to change the HDMI resolution. See Resetting the output resolution to the default setting with HDMI connection o n p a g e 1 6 i f y o u want to reset the output resolution . No multichannel HDMI audio. ⢠Make sure the HD MI Out setting is set to Auto , Auto (DSD) or LPCM (5.1CH) (see HDMI Out on page 39 to do this). See also About the HDMI audio output settings on page 47 and HDMI output with DVD-Audio and SACD sources on page 48. No sound is output from the AUDIO OUT (5.1ch) jack when conne cted via HDMI. ⢠Check whether or not HDMI Out is set to Off . (See HDMI O ut on page 39.) Component Out can not be set to Interlace. ⢠You can use the Interlace setting if the HDMI Resolution is set to 720 x 480i . DV48AV_EN.bo ok 57 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additiona l information 09 58 En USB troubleshooting Note ⢠Static electricity or other exte rnal influences may cause ma lfun ctioning of this un it. In this case, unplug the power cord and th en plug back in. Th is will usually reset th e unit for proper operation. If this doe s not co rrect the problem, plea se consult your nearest Pioneer service center. A connected DVI component (w ith HDCP) doesnâÂÂt work with this player. ⢠This unit has been designed to be compliant with HDMI (High- Definition Multimedia Inter face) . Depending on the component you have connected, us ing a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal transfers. Problem Remedy Problem Remedy USB mass storage devic e is not recognized by the system. ⢠Make sure you have co mpletely inserted the USB connector to this unit. ⢠Check that the memory format is FAT16 or FAT32 . ⢠USB devices with an intern al USB hub are not supported. Files donâÂÂt show up in the Navigator/Photo Browser. ⢠The files must have the corre ct file extension: .mp3 for MP3 files; .wma for WMA files; .m4a for MPEG-4 AAC files; . j pg for JPEG files (upper o r lower- case is OK). ⢠Make sure the file perm issi on hasnâÂÂt been restri cted (t hrough a pa ssword, etc.). CanâÂÂt play WMA or MPEG- 4 AAC files. ⢠The files were recorded us ing DRM (dig ital rights mana gement) or FairPlay copy- protectio n. This is not a malfun ction. DV48AV_EN.bo ok 58 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additiona l information 09 59 En Glossary Analog audio Direct representation of sound by an electrical signal. See also Digital audi o . Aspect ratio The width of a TV screen relative to its height. Conventional TVs a re 4:3; widescreen mode ls ar e 16:9. Bonus Group (DVD-Audio only) An âÂÂextraâ group on some DVD-Audio discs that requires a key number to access. Browsable pictures (DVD-Audio only) A feature of some DVD-Audio discs in which the user can browse still pictures recorded on the disc as the audio is played. Digital audio In direct representation of sound using numbers. See also Sampli ng freque ncy and Analog audio . DivX DivX is a media technology create d by DivX, Inc. DivX media files contain not only video but also include advanced media features like menus, subtitles, and alternate audiotracks. Dolby Digital A multi-channel audio encoding system developed by Dolby Laboratories that enables fa r more audio to be stored on a disc than PCM encoding. See als o PCM (Pulse Code Modulation ) . DRM DRM (digital rights management) copy protection is a technology designed to prevent unauthori zed copyin g by restricting playback, e tc. of compressed audio files on devices other than the PC (or ot her recording equipment) used to record it. For detailed information, please see the instruction manuals or help files that came with your PC and/or software. DTS A multi-channel audio encoding system developed by Digital Theater Systems that enables far more audio to be stored on a disc than PCM encoding. See als o PCM (Pulse Code Modulation ) . DSD (Direct Stream Digital) The Digital Audio encoding system found on SACDs, that expr esses the audio signals by the pulse density of one bit data. EXIF (Exchangeable Image File) A file format developed by FUJIFI LM for digital still cameras. Digital cameras from various manufacturers use this compressed file format which car ries date, time and thumbnail informa tion, as well as the picture data. File extension A tag added to the end of a filename to indicate the type of fil e. For example, âÂÂ.mp3â indicates an MP3 file. HDMI HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is a high-speed digital interface which has the capability to support standard, enhanced, or high- definition video plus standard to multi- channel surround-sound aud io on a single d igital co nn ection. HDMI features include uncompressed digital video, a bandwidth of up to 5 gigabytes per second and communication between the AV sourc e and AV devices such as DTVs. ISO 9660 format Intern ational sta ndard fo r the vo lume and file structure of CD-ROM discs. JPEG A standard file format used for still images. JPEG files are identified by the file extension âÂÂ.jpgâ . MP3 M P3 (MPEG1 audio layer 3) is a compressed stereo audio file format. Files are rec ognized by their file extension âÂÂ.mp3âÂÂ. MPEG-4 AAC MPEG-4 AAC is a compr essed ste reo audio file format. Files are recognized by the extention âÂÂ.m4aâÂÂ. Note that some files purchased with copyright protection (such as files from the iTunes store) may not playback. MPEG audio An audio format used on Video CDs and some DVD discs. Packed PCM (DVD-Audio only) A lossless compression system th at enables more PCM audio to be stored on a DVD-Audio disc than would otherwise be possible. PBC (PlayBack Control) A system of navigating a Video CD through on-screen menus recorded onto the disc. PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) Digital audio encoding system found on CDs. Good quality, but requires a lot of data compared to Dolby Digital , DTS and MPEG encoded audio. See also Digital a udio . DV48AV_EN.bo ok 59 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additiona l information 09 60 En Progressive scan video All the lines that make up a vide o picture are updated in one pass (compared to interlace w hich takes two passes to update the whole picture). Regions (DVD-Video only) These associate DVD-Video discs and players with particular areas of the world. See DVD-Vide o regions on page 53 for more information. Sampling frequency The rate at which sound is measured t o be turned into digital audio data. The higher the rate, the better the sound quality. CD is 44.1 kHz; DVD can be up to 96 kHz. See also Digital a udio . Super Audio CD (SACD) Super Audio CD is a high quality audio disc format that can accommodate high sampling rate stereo and multi- channel audio, as well as conventional CD audio all on the same disc. WMA WMA is short for Windows Media Audio and refers to an audio compression technology developed by Microsoft Corporation. Files are recognized by their file extension âÂÂ.wmaâÂÂ. WMV WMV is an acron ym for Windows Media Video and refers to a video compression technology developed by Microsoft Corporation. Files are recognized by the file extension âÂÂ.wmvâÂÂ. DV48AV_EN.bo ok 60 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additiona l information 09 61 En Language code list Language (Language co de letter), Language code Country/Area code list Country/Area, Country/Area co de, Country/Ar ea code letter Japanese (ja), 1001 English (en), 0514 French ( fr), 0618 German (de), 0405 Italian (it), 0920 Spanish (es), 0519 Chinese (zh), 2608 Dutch (nl), 1412 Portuguese (pt), 1620 Swedish (sv), 1922 Russian (ru), 1821 Korean (ko), 1115 Greek (el), 0512 Afar ( aa), 0101 Abkhazian (ab), 0102 Afrikaans (af), 0106 Amharic (am), 0113 Arabic (ar), 0118 Assamese (as), 0119 Aymara (ay), 0125 Azerbaijani (az), 0126 Bashkir (ba), 0201 Byelorussian (be), 0205 Bulgarian (bg), 0207 Bihari (bh), 0208 Bislama (bi), 0209 Bengali (bn), 0214 Tibetan (bo ), 0215 Breton (br), 0218 Catalan (ca), 0301 Corsican (co), 0315 Czech (cs), 0319 Welsh (cy), 0325 Danish (da), 0401 Bhutani (dz), 0426 Esperanto (eo), 05 15 Estonian (et), 0520 Basque (eu), 0521 Persian (fa), 0601 Finnish (fi), 0609 Fiji (fj), 0610 Faroese (fo), 0615 Frisian (fy), 0625 Irish (ga), 0701 Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704 Galician (gl), 0712 Guarani (gn), 0714 Gujarati (gu), 0721 Hausa (ha), 0801 Hindi (hi), 0809 Croat ian (h r), 0818 Hungarian (hu), 0821 Armenian (hy), 0825 Interlingua (ia), 0901 Interlingue (ie), 0905 Inupiak (ik), 0911 Indonesian (in), 0914 Iceland ic (is), 09 19 Hebrew (iw), 0923 Yiddish (ji), 1 009 Javane se (j w), 1023 Georgian (ka), 1101 Kazakh (kk), 1111 Greenlandic (kl), 1112 Cambo dian ( km), 1113 Kannada (kn), 1114 Kashmiri (ks), 1119 Kurdish (ku), 1121 Kirghiz (ky), 1125 Latin (la), 1201 Lingala (ln), 1214 Laothian (lo), 1215 Lithuanian (lt), 1220 Latvian (lv), 1222 Malagasy (mg), 1307 Maori (mi), 1309 Macedonian (mk), 1311 Malayalam (ml), 1312 Mongolian (mn), 1314 Moldavian (mo), 1315 Marathi (mr), 1318 Malay (ms), 1319 Maltese (mt), 1320 Burmes e (my), 1325 Nauru (na), 1401 Nepali (ne), 1405 Norwegian (no), 1415 Occitan (oc), 1503 Oromo (om), 1513 Oriya (or), 1518 Panjabi (pa), 1601 Polish (pl), 1612 Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619 Quechua (qu), 1721 Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 18 13 Kirundi (rn), 1814 Roma nian (ro) , 1815 Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823 Sanskrit (sa), 1901 Sindhi (sd), 1904 Sangho (sg), 1907 Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908 Sinhalese (si), 1909 Slovak (sk), 1911 Slovenian (sl), 1912 Samoan (sm), 1913 Shona (sn), 1914 Somali (so), 1915 Albanian (sq), 19 17 Serbian (sr), 1918 Siswati (ss), 1919 Sesotho (st), 1920 Sundanese (su), 1921 Swahili (sw), 1923 Tamil (ta), 2001 Telugu (te), 2005 Tajik (tg), 2007 Thai (th), 2008 Tigrinya (ti), 2009 Turkmen (tk), 2011 Tagalog (tl), 2012 Setswana (tn), 2014 Tonga (to), 2015 Turkish (tr), 2018 Tsonga (ts ), 2019 Tatar (tt), 2020 Twi (tw), 2023 Ukrainian (uk), 2111 Urdu (ur), 2118 Uzbek (uz), 2126 Vietnamese (vi), 2209 Volapük ( vo), 2215 Wolof (wo), 2315 Xhosa (xh), 2408 Yoruba (yo), 2515 Zulu (zu), 2621 Argentina, 0118 , ar Australia, 0121 , au Austria, 0120 , at Belgium, 0205 , be Brazil, 0218 , br Canada, 0301 , ca Chile, 0312 , cl China, 0314 , cn Denmark, 0411 , dk Finland , 0609 , fi Franc e, 0618 , fr Germany, 0405 , de Hong Kong, 0811 , hk India, 0914 , in Indonesia, 09 04 , id Italy, 0920 , it Japan, 1016 , jp Korea, Republic of, 1118 , kr Malaysia, 1325 , my Mexico, 1324 , mx Netherlands, 1412 , nl New Zealand, 1426 , nz Norway, 1415 , no Pakistan, 1611 , pk Philippines, 1608 , ph Portugal, 1620 , pt Russian Federat ion, 1821 , ru Singapore, 1907 , sg Spain, 0519 , es Sweden, 1905 , se Switzerland, 0308 , ch Taiwan, 2023 , tw Thailand, 2008 , th United Kingdom, 0702 , gb USA, 2119 , us DV48AV_EN.bo ok 61 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additiona l information 09 62 En Specifications General Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC 120 V, 60 Hz Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 W Power consumption (standby) . . . . . . . . . . 0.7 W Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6 kg (5 lb 12 oz) Dimensions 420 mm (W) x 51.5 mm (H) x 215.5 mm (D) (16-9/16 in. (W) x 2-1/16 in. (H) x 8-1/2 in. (D)) Operating temperature . . . . . . . 5 ðC to 35 ðC ( 41 ðF to 95 ðF) Operating humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 % to 85 % (no condensation) Component video output Y (luminance) - Output level . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 é ) P B (color) - Output level . . . . . . . . 0.7 Vp-p (75 é ) P R (color) - Output level . . . . . . . . 0.7 Vp-p (75 é ) Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .RCA S-video output Y (luminance) - Output level . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 é ) C (color) - Output level . . . . . . . 286 mVp-p (75 é ) Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-video Video output Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 é ) Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .RCA Audio output (1 stereo pair) Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . During audio output 200 mVrms (1 kHz, âÂÂ20 dB) Number of channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .RCA HDMI output HDMI output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 pin Audio output (multi-channel / L, R, C, SW, SL, SR) Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . .During audio output 200 mVrms (1 kHz, âÂÂ20 dB) Number of channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA Digital audio characteristics Frequency response . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Hz to 44 kHz S/N ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 dB Dynamic range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 dB Total harmonic distortion . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0023 % Wow and flutter . . . . . . . . Limit of measurement (ñ0.001 % W. PEAK) or lower Digital output Coaxial digital output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA Optical digital output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optical Accessories Remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 AA/R6P dry cell batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Audio/video cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Operating i nstructions The specif ications an d design of this product are sub ject to change without noti ce, due to im provemen t. DV48AV_EN.bo ok 62 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
<VRB1473-A> Printed in Thailand <07F00001> Published b y Pioneer Cor poration. Cop yright é 2007 Pioneer Cor poration. All rights reser ved. PIONEER CORPORA TION 4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, T okyo 153-8654, Japan PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P .O . BO X 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U .S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANAD A, INC. 300 Allstate P ar kwa y , Mar kham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411 PIONEER EUROPE NV Hav en 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele , Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIA CENTRE PTE. L TD . 253 Ale xandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555 PIONEER ELECTRONICS A USTRALIA PTY . L TD . 178-184 Boundar y Road, Braeside , Victor ia 3195, Austr alia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V . Blvd.Manuel A vila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Me xico ,D .F . 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270 Should this product requi r e se r vice in the U.S.A. and you wish to locate the nea rest P ionee r Autho rized Inde pendent Se r vice Com pany , o r if you wish to pu rchase re placement pa r ts, o pe rating inst r uctions, se r vice manuals, o r accesso ries, please call the numbe r shown below . 8 0 0 â 4 2 1 â 1 4 0 4 Please do not shi p you r product to P ionee r without fi rst calling the Custome r Su ppo r t Division at the above listed numbe r fo r assistance. P ionee r Elect r onics (USA) Inc. Custome r Su ppo r t Division P .O . BOX 1760, Long Beach, CA 90801-1760, U.S.A. Fo r warr anty infor mation p lease see the Limited W a rranty sheet included with you r pr oduct. Should this product requi r e se r vice in Canada, please contact a P ionee r Canadian Autho rized Deale r to locate the nea rest P ionee r Autho rized Se r vice Com p any in Canada. Alte rnatively , please contact the Custome r Satisfaction De pa rtment at the following add r ess: P ionee r Elect ronics of Canada, Inc. Custome r Satisfaction De pa r tment 300 Allstate P a rkway , Ma r kham, Onta r io L3R 0P2 1-877-283-5901 905-479-4411 Fo r warr anty infor mation p lease see the Limited W a rranty sheet included with you r pr oduct. Si ce produit doit êt re ré pa ré au Canada, veuillez vous ad resse r àun dist ributeu r auto risé P ionee r du Canada pou r obteni r le nom du Cent r e de Se r vice Auto r isé P ionee r le p lus pr ès de chez-vous. V ous pouvez aussi contacte r le Se r vice àla clientèle de Pionee r : P ionee r ÃÂlect roniques du Canada, Inc. Se r vice Clientèle 300, Allstate P a r kway , Ma rkham, Onta r io L3R 0P2 1-877-283-5901 905-479-4411 Po u r obtenir des r enseignements sur la gar antie, veuillez vous r ep or te r au feuillet sur la ga rantie r est r einte qui accom pagne le pr oduit. S018_B_EF DV48AV_EN.bo ok 64 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ